Sei sulla pagina 1di 244

ANSYS Mechanical APDL Feature Archive

ANSYS, Inc.
Southpointe
275 Technology Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317
ansysinfo@ansys.com
http://www.ansys.com
(T) 724-746-3304
(F) 724-514-9494

Release 13.0
November 2010
ANSYS, Inc. is
certified to ISO
9001:2008.

Copyright and Trademark Information


2010 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.
ANSYS, ANSYS Workbench, Ansoft, AUTODYN, EKM, Engineering Knowledge Manager, CFX, FLUENT, HFSS and any and
all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or trademarks
of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used by ANSYS, Inc.
under license. CFX is a trademark of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service and feature names
or trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Disclaimer Notice
THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFIDENTIAL
AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting laws, warranties,
disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products and documentation may
be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions of that software license
agreement.
ANSYS, Inc. is certified to ISO 9001:2008.

U.S. Government Rights


For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc. software
license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).

Third-Party Software
See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software and
third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, please contact ANSYS, Inc.
Published in the U.S.A.

Table of Contents
About This Archive ...................................................................................................................................... vii
I. Legacy Features ....................................................................................................................................... 1
1. Piping Models ................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1. What the Piping Commands Can Do for You ................................................................................ 3
1.2. Modeling Piping Systems with Piping Commands ....................................................................... 3
1.2.1. Specify the Jobname and Title ............................................................................................ 4
1.2.2. Set Up the Basic Piping Data ............................................................................................... 4
1.2.3. Define the Piping System's Geometry ................................................................................. 4
1.2.3.1. Review and Modify Your Piping Model ....................................................................... 5
1.3. Example Piping Model Input ....................................................................................................... 5
2. Subroutine usflex (Computes the flexibility factor for PIPE16 and PIPE18) .................................... 9
3. Restarting a Direct Coupled-Field Analysis .................................................................................... 11
3.1. Singleframe Restart ................................................................................................................... 11
3.1.1. Singleframe Restart Requirements .................................................................................... 11
3.1.2. Singleframe Restart Procedure ......................................................................................... 13
3.1.3. Restarting a Nonlinear Analysis From an Incompatible Database ....................................... 14
3.1.3.1. Re-establishing Boundary Conditions ....................................................................... 15
II. Legacy Commands ................................................................................................................................ 17
III. Legacy Elements .................................................................................................................................. 61
BEAM4 ................................................................................................................................................. 63
CONTAC12 ........................................................................................................................................... 77
PIPE16 .................................................................................................................................................. 85
PIPE18 .................................................................................................................................................. 95
PLANE42 ............................................................................................................................................ 105
SOLID45 ............................................................................................................................................ 113
CONTAC52 ......................................................................................................................................... 121
PIPE59 ................................................................................................................................................ 129
SHELL63 ............................................................................................................................................ 147
PLANE82 ............................................................................................................................................ 157
SOLID92 ............................................................................................................................................ 165
SOLID95 ............................................................................................................................................ 171
IV. Legacy Theory .................................................................................................................................... 179
1. Archived Theory Element Library ................................................................................................. 181
1.1. BEAM4 - 3-D Elastic Beam ........................................................................................................ 181
1.1.1. Stiffness and Mass Matrices ............................................................................................ 181
1.1.2. Gyroscopic Damping Matrix ........................................................................................... 185
1.1.3. Pressure and Temperature Load Vector ........................................................................... 185
1.1.4. Local to Global Conversion ............................................................................................. 185
1.1.5. Stress Calculations .......................................................................................................... 187
1.2. CONTAC12 - 2-D Point-to-Point Contact ................................................................................... 189
1.2.1. Element Matrices ............................................................................................................ 189
1.2.2. Orientation of the Element ............................................................................................. 191
1.2.3. Rigid Coulomb Friction ................................................................................................... 191
1.3. PIPE16 - Elastic Straight Pipe .................................................................................................... 192
1.3.1. Assumptions and Restrictions ......................................................................................... 193
1.3.2. Stiffness Matrix ............................................................................................................... 193
1.3.3. Mass Matrix .................................................................................................................... 194
1.3.4. Gyroscopic Damping Matrix ........................................................................................... 194
1.3.5. Load Vector .................................................................................................................... 195
1.3.6. Stress Calculation ........................................................................................................... 197
Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

iii

ANSYS Mechanical APDL Feature Archive


1.4. PIPE18 - Elastic Curved Pipe ..................................................................................................... 203
1.4.1. Other Applicable Sections .............................................................................................. 204
1.4.2. Stiffness Matrix ............................................................................................................... 204
1.4.3. Mass Matrix .................................................................................................................... 207
1.4.4. Load Vector .................................................................................................................... 207
1.4.5. Stress Calculations .......................................................................................................... 208
1.5. PLANE42 - 2-D Structural Solid ................................................................................................ 208
1.5.1. Other Applicable Sections .............................................................................................. 209
1.6. SOLID45 - 3-D Structural Solid ................................................................................................. 209
1.6.1. Other Applicable Sections .............................................................................................. 210
1.7. CONTAC52 - 3-D Point-to-Point Contact ................................................................................... 210
1.7.1. Other Applicable Sections .............................................................................................. 211
1.7.2. Element Matrices ............................................................................................................ 211
1.7.3. Orientation of Element ................................................................................................... 212
1.8. PIPE59 - Immersed Pipe or Cable ............................................................................................. 212
1.8.1. Overview of the Element ................................................................................................ 213
1.8.2. Location of the Element .................................................................................................. 213
1.8.3. Stiffness Matrix ............................................................................................................... 214
1.8.4. Mass Matrix .................................................................................................................... 215
1.8.5. Load Vector .................................................................................................................... 215
1.8.6. Hydrostatic Effects .......................................................................................................... 216
1.8.7. Hydrodynamic Effects ..................................................................................................... 218
1.8.8. Stress Output ................................................................................................................. 218
1.9. SHELL63 - Elastic Shell ............................................................................................................. 220
1.9.1. Other Applicable Sections .............................................................................................. 221
1.9.2. Foundation Stiffness ....................................................................................................... 221
1.9.3. In-Plane Rotational Stiffness ........................................................................................... 222
1.9.4. Warping ......................................................................................................................... 222
1.9.5. Options for Non-Uniform Material ................................................................................... 223
1.9.6. Extrapolation of Results to the Nodes ............................................................................. 225
1.10. PLANE82 - 2-D 8-Node Structural Solid .................................................................................. 225
1.10.1. Other Applicable Sections ............................................................................................ 225
1.10.2. Assumptions and Restrictions ....................................................................................... 225
1.11. SOLID92 - 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid ............................................................... 226
1.11.1. Other Applicable Sections ............................................................................................ 226
1.12. SOLID95 - 3-D 20-Node Structural Solid ................................................................................. 227
1.12.1. Other Applicable Sections ............................................................................................ 227
2. Hydrodynamic Loads on Line Elements ........................................................................................ 229
2.1. Wave Theory ........................................................................................................................... 229

List of Figures
1.1. Order of Degrees of Freedom .............................................................................................................. 182
1.2. Force-Deflection Relations for Standard Case ....................................................................................... 191
1.3. Force-Deflection Relations for Rigid Coulomb Option .......................................................................... 192
1.4. Thermal and Pressure Effects ............................................................................................................... 197
1.5. Elastic Pipe Direct Stress Output .......................................................................................................... 199
1.6. Elastic Pipe Shear Stress Output .......................................................................................................... 199
1.7. Stress Point Locations ......................................................................................................................... 202
1.8. Mohr Circles ........................................................................................................................................ 202
1.9. Plane Element ..................................................................................................................................... 204
iv

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

ANSYS Mechanical APDL Feature Archive


2.1. Velocity Profiles for Wave-Current Interactions ..................................................................................... 233

List of Tables
3.1. Restart Information for Nonlinear Analyses ............................................................................................ 12
1.1. Stress Intensification Factors ............................................................................................................... 199
2.1. Wave Theory Table .............................................................................................................................. 229

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

vi

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

About This Archive


The purpose of this archive is to provide a location for legacy feature, element, theory, and command documentation.
The Mechanical APDL product continues to provide limited support for capabilities documented in this
archive. In most cases, however, access via the graphical user interface (GUI) is no longer available.
As Mechanical APDL evolves and improves, be aware that ANSYS, Inc. may undocument and discontinue
support for any legacy capability at a future release.
The following topics are available:

Part I:Legacy Features (p. 1)

Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17)

Part III:Legacy Elements (p. 61)

Part IV:Legacy Theory (p. 179)

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

vii

viii

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Legacy Features
Following is the archived documentation for legacy Mechanical APDL features.

Chapter 1: Piping Models


The ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, ANSYS Structural, and ANSYS Professional products offer a
group of commands that enable you to model piping systems and their loads in terms of conventional
piping input data, instead of in terms of standard ANSYS direct-generation modeling operations. As you input
piping commands, the program internally converts your piping data to direct-generation model data, then
stores the converted information in the database. Once this information is stored, you can list it, display it,
modify it, redefine it, etc., using any of the standard direct-generation commands.
The piping system modeling methods described here apply to straight-pipe PIPE16 and curved-pipe PIPE18
elements. (Both elements are described in Part III: Legacy Elements.)
The following topics concerning piping models are available:
1.1. What the Piping Commands Can Do for You
1.2. Modeling Piping Systems with Piping Commands
1.3. Example Piping Model Input

1.1. What the Piping Commands Can Do for You


Some special features of the piping module are:

Creates a line model of a piping network using straight-pipe PIPE16 and curved-pipe PIPE18 elements.
(Both elements are described in Part III:Legacy Elements (p. 61).) Node and element geometry are defined
in terms of incremental run lengths and bend radii, rather than in terms of absolute coordinates.

Automatically calculates tangency points for bends.

Relates standard piping designations (such as nominal diameter and schedule) to geometric values.

Assigns pipe specifications to element real constants.

Calculates and assigns flexibility and stress intensification factors based on the pressures and the temperatures specified in the pipe module before the creation of the piping elements as appropriate for
each element type. The flexibility factors are not be changed automatically if the pipe pressures or
temperatures are subsequently revised.

Determines drag pressure loads from a pressure vs. height relationship.

1.2. Modeling Piping Systems with Piping Commands


Building a model with the piping commands consists of three primary tasks:
1.2.1. Specify the Jobname and Title
1.2.2. Set Up the Basic Piping Data
1.2.3. Define the Piping System's Geometry
All piping commands referenced here are described in Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).
Other actions required for a piping system analysis include applying additional loads (D, F, etc.), obtaining
the solution, and reviewing the results. See the Basic Analysis Guide for more information.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 1: Piping Models

1.2.1. Specify the Jobname and Title


Perform these steps at the Begin level.
1.

Specify the jobname you want to use for all files that are subsequently created by the analysis (/FILNAME).

2.

Write an analysis file (/TITLE).

3.

Issue a "reminder" to yourself about the system of units you intend to use (/UNITS).
This step does not convert data from one system of units to another.

1.2.2. Set Up the Basic Piping Data


Set up the basic piping data as follows:
1.

Enter PREP7 (/PREP7).

2.

Define the material properties for all materials referenced by the model (MP, MPTEMP, etc.).

3.

Select a system of units, if other than consistent (PUNIT).


The PUNIT command determines how the program interprets the data input for the PDRAG, BRANCH,
RUN, BEND, MITER, REDUCE, VALVE, BELLOW, FLANGE, PSPRNG, PGAP, /PSPEC, PINSUL, and PCORRO
commands. The difference between PUNIT and the /UNITS command is that PUNIT affects how the
program behaves, whereas /UNITS does not.

4.

Define the pipe specifications. These specifications are applied to the elements as they are generated
via the RUN command.
a.
b.

Define the contained fluid density for a piping run (PFLUID).

c.

Define the external insulation constants in a piping run (PINSUL).

d.
5.

Define pipe material and dimensions (PSPEC).

Specify the allowable exterior corrosion thickness for a piping run (PCORRO).

Select the piping analysis standard (POPT).:


The program calculates and assigns flexibility and stress intensification factors for curved pipe elements
based on the pressures and the temperatures specified in the pipe module before the creation of the
piping elements as appropriate for each element type. The flexibility factors and stress intensification
factors are not changed retroactively if the pipe pressures or temperatures are subsequently revised.

6.

Select the pipe loadings.


a.

Define the pipe wall temperatures in a piping run (PTEMP).

b.

Define the internal pressure for a piping run (PPRES).

c.

Define the external fluid drag loading for a piping run (PDRAG).

1.2.3. Define the Piping System's Geometry


Define the basic skeleton layout of your piping model as follows.
1.

Specify the starting point of your piping system (BRANCH).

2.

Follow up with a series of RUN commands to define incremental "straight" runs of pipe.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.3. Example Piping Model Input


Pipe elements are generated "straight" in the active coordinate system. Each RUN command uses
length dimensions in the format specified by the PUNIT command to generate a node and a PIPE16
element (along with its real constants, material properties, and loads).
3.

Insert bends and other components (tees, valves, reducers, flanges, bellows, and spring restraints) into
the model at existing nodes that are shared by two or more existing pipe elements. The program
automatically updates your model's geometry to account for the inserted components. Inserted pipe
components take their specifications and loadings from the adjacent straight pipes.

To define a bend in a piping run, issue the BEND command.

To define a mitered bend in a piping run, issue the MITER command.

To define a tee in a piping run, issue the TEE command.

To define a valve in a piping run, issue the VALVE command.

To define a reducer in a piping run, issue the REDUCE command.

To define a flange in a piping run, issue the FLANGE command.

To define a bellows in a piping run, issue the BELLOW command.

To define a spring constraint in a piping run, issue the PSPRNG command.

To define a spring-gap constraint in a piping run, issue the PGAP command.

Another BRANCH command defines the junction point from which another run of pipe branches off of the
previously defined run. Subsequent RUN commands define, in incremental fashion, another run of "straight"
pipe elements, starting from the last junction point.

1.2.3.1. Review and Modify Your Piping Model


When you have completed piping data input, you can review the information that has been stored in the
database via standard listing and display commands (NLIST, NPLOT, ELIST, EPLOT, SFELIST, BFELIST, etc.).
If necessary, you can modify the data using standard procedures for revising your model and your loads.
See "Loading" in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.

1.3. Example Piping Model Input


The following example input shows how to model this piping system:

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 1: Piping Models


End of first run

X
Z

Start of second run


(second BRANCH)

BEND

Hangers (PSPRNG)

TEE
End of second run

MITER

Starting point (first BRANCH)

!
! Sample piping data input
!
/FILNAM,EXAMPLE
/TITLE, EXAMPLE PIPING INPUT
/UNITS,BIN
! A reminder that consistent units are U. S. Customary inches
!
/PREP7
! Define material properties for pipe elements
MP,EX,1,30e6
MP,PRXY,1,0.3
MP,ALPX,1,8e-6
MP,DENS,1,.283
PUNIT,1
! Units are read as ft+in+fraction and converted to
! decimal inches
PSPEC,1,8,STD
! 8" standard pipe
POPT,B31.1
! Piping analysis standard: ANSI B31.1
PTEMP,200
! Temperature = 200
PPRES,1000
! Internal pressure = 1000 psi
PDRAG,,,-.2
! Drag = 0.2 psi in -Z direction at any height (Y)
BRANCH,1,0+12,0+12 ! Start first pipe run at (12",12",0")
RUN,,7+4
! Run 7'-4" in +Y direction
RUN,9+5+1/2
! Run 9'-5 1/2" in +X direction
RUN,,,-8+4
! Run 8'-4" in -Z direction
RUN,,8+4
! Run 8'-4" in +Y direction
/PNUM,NODE,1
/VIEW,1,1,2,3
EPLOT
! Identify node number at which 2nd run starts
BRANCH,4
! Start second pipe run at node 4
RUN,6+2+1/2
! Run 6'-2 1/2" in +X direction
TEE,4,WT
! Insert a tee at node 4
/PNUM,DEFA
/PNUM,ELEM,1
EPLOT
! Identify element numbers for bend and miter inserts
BEND,1,2,SR
! Insert a "short-radius" bend between elements 1 and 2
MITER,2,3,LR,2
! Insert a two-piece miter between elements 2 and 3
/PNUM,DEFA
/PNUM,NODE,1
! Zoom in on miter bend to identify nodes for spring hangers
/ZOOM, 1, 242.93
, 206.62
, -39.059
, 26.866
PSPRNG,14,TRAN,1e4,,0+12
! Insert Y-direction spring at node 14
PSPRNG,16,TRAN,1e4,,0+12
! Insert Y-direction spring at node 16

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.3. Example Piping Model Input


! List and display interpreted input data
/AUTO
/PNUM,DEFA
EPLOT
NLIST
ELIST
SFELIST
BFELIST
!

Although two hangers are provided, more restraints are needed before proceeding to the solution.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 2: Subroutine usflex (Computes the flexibility factor for


PIPE16 and PIPE18)
Legacy pipe elements PIPE16 and PIPE18 are described in Part III:Legacy Elements (p. 61).
*deck,usflex
subroutine usflex (etype,elem,rvrm,kff,prs,ex, flexi,flexo)
c *** primary function:
to (re)compute the flexibility factor
c
for pipe16, pipe17, pipe18, and pipe60
c
this is accessed by inputting the flexibility factor
c
as any negative number.
c *** secondary functions: none
c
c *** Notice - This file contains ANSYS Confidential information ***
c
c
*** copyright(c) 2009 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved.
c
*** ansys, inc.
c
c
typ=int,dp,log,chr,dcp
siz=sc,ar(n)
intent=in,out,inout
c
c input arguments:
c
variable (typ,siz,intent)
description
c
etype
(int,sc,in)
- pipe element type (16, 17, 18 or 60)
c
elem
(int,sc,in)
- element number
c
rvrm
(dp,ar(*),in)
- real constants
c
kff
(int,sc,in)
- keyopt for flexibility factor
c
(not used for pipe16 or pipe17)
c
prs
(dp,ar(5),in)
- pressures
c
ex
(dp,sc,in)
- young's Modulus
c
flexi
(dp,sc,inout)
- effective in-plane flexibility factor
c
flexo
(dp,sc,inout)
- effective out-of-plane flexibility factor
c
(not used for pipe16 or pipe17)
c
c output arguments:
c
variable (typ,siz,intent)
description
c
flexi
(dp,sc,inout)
- effective in-plane flexibility factor
c
flexo
(dp,sc,inout)
- effective out-of-plane flexibility factor
c
(not used for pipe16 or pipe17)
c

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

10

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 3: Restarting a Direct Coupled-Field Analysis


To restart a direct coupled-field analysis, ANSYS Inc. recommends using a singleframe restart. Direct coupledfield analyses use a coupled-field element containing all necessary degrees of freedom. See the CoupledField Analysis Guide for more information on this type of coupled-field analysis.

3.1. Singleframe Restart


A traditional restart requires that certain files from the initial run of the job are present, and requires that
you make any changes to the input before the SOLVE command.

3.1.1. Singleframe Restart Requirements


When restarting from a static or full transient analysis, the following files must be available from the initial
run:

Jobname.DB - The database file saved immediately after the initial SOLVE. If you save the database
at any point later in the analysis, boundary conditions and other variables may be changed from their
initial values, which would prevent the restart from running properly. (For non-converged solutions,
the database file is saved automatically; see the note below.)

Jobname.EMAT - Element matrices (if created).

Jobname.ESAV or .OSAV - Element saved data (.ESAV) or old element saved data (.OSAV). Jobname.OSAV is required only if the .ESAV file is missing, incomplete, or otherwise corrupted because
of a diverging solution; because the displacement limit was exceeded; or because of a negative pivot
(see Table 3.1: Restart Information for Nonlinear Analyses (p. 12)). It is written if KSTOP is set to 1 (default)
or 2 on the NCNV command, or if automatic time stepping is active. If the .OSAV file is required, you
must rename it as Jobname.ESAV before restarting the analysis.

Results file - Not required, but if available, results from the restart run will be appended to it with the
proper, sequential load step and substep numbers. If the initial run terminated because the number of
results sets on the results file were exceeded, you will need to rename the initial results file to a different
name before restarting. To do so, issue the /ASSIGN command (Utility Menu> File> ANSYS File Options).

When restarting from a mode-superposition transient analysis, the following files must be available from
the initial run:

Jobname.DB -- The database file saved immediately after the initial solve operation (SOLVE). If you
save the database at any point later in the analysis, boundary conditions and other variables may be
changed from their initial values, which would prevent the restart from running properly.

Jobname.RDSP -- The reduced displacement file with information from the last substep of the last
load step needed for restart.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

11

Chapter 3: Restarting a Direct Coupled-Field Analysis

Note
In a nonlinear analysis, if the program terminates due to nonconvergence, time limits, the abort
file (Jobname.ABT), or other program-detected failure, the database is automatically saved, and
the solution output (Jobname.OUT) will list the files and other information required for restarting.
See also Table 3.1: Restart Information for Nonlinear Analyses (p. 12) for a list of termination causes
and the element saved data file needed to restart.
If the files .RDB, .LDHI, or .Rnnn/.Mnnn were accidentally created from a previous run, you
must delete them before performing a singleframe restart.
In interactive mode, an existing database file is first written to a backup file (Jobname.DBB). In
batch mode, an existing database file is replaced by the current database information with no
backup.

Table 3.1 Restart Information for Nonlinear Analyses


Cause of Termination

Element Saved
Data File

Normal (i.e., no errors)

Jobname.ESAV

Add more load steps at the end of your job.

Nonconvergence

Jobname.OSAV

Define a smaller time step, change the adaptive


descent option, or take other action to enhance
convergence. Rename Jobname.OSAV as Jobname.ESAV before restarting.

Nonconvergence due to
insufficient equilibrium
iterations

Jobname.ESAV

If the solution was converging, allow more equilibrium equations (NEQIT command).

Cumulative iteration
limit exceeded (NCNV
command)

Jobname.ESAV

Increase ITLIM on NCNV command.

Time limit exceeded


(NCNV)

Jobname.ESAV

None (simply restart the analysis). (If you were running the analysis interactively and you want to restart it from within the same ANSYS session, you
must reset the time limits before attempting the
restart.)

Displacement limit exceeded (NCNV)

Jobname.OSAV

(Same as for nonconvergence.)

Negative pivot

Jobname.OSAV

(Same as for nonconvergence.)

Jobname.ABT

Jobname.ESAV,
Jobname.OSAV

Make whatever changes are necessary to address


the behavior that caused you to voluntarily terminate the analysis.

if solution was converging

Required Corrective Action

if solution was diverging

12

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

3.1.2. Singleframe Restart Procedure


Cause of Termination

Element Saved
Data File

Required Corrective Action

"Full" results file (more


than 1000 substeps).
Time steps output.

Jobname.ESAV

Could indicate a problem - check settings on CNVTOL, DELTIM, and NSUBST, or KEYOPT(7) for
contact elements. Or, specify larger number of results allowed on results file [/CONFIG,NRES] before
solution or reduce the number of results to be
output. Also rename results file (/ASSIGN).

"Killed" job (system


break), system crash, or
system time-limit exceeded

Not applicable

No restart is possible.

Note
Singleframe restart does not support surface-to-surface, node-to-surface, line-to-line, or line-tosurface contact. Use multiframe restart if your model contains any of the following contact elements: CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, CONTA177.

3.1.2. Singleframe Restart Procedure


If you are performing a mode-superposition transient analysis, ANSYS sets up the parameters for a singleframe
restart by default.
The procedure for performing the restart analysis is as follows:
1.

Enter the ANSYS program and specify the same jobname that was used in the initial run with /FILNAME
(Utility Menu> File> Change Jobname).

2.

Enter the SOLUTION processor using /SOLU (Main Menu> Solution), then resume the database file
using RESUME (Utility Menu> File> Resume Jobname.db).

3.

Indicate that this is a restart analysis by issuing ANTYPE,,REST (Main Menu> Solution> Restart).

4.

Specify revised or additional loads as needed. Modified ramped loads start from their previous values.
Newly applied ramped loads are ramped from zero; newly applied body loads start from initial values.
Deleted loads which are reapplied are treated as new, not modified, loads. In static and full transient
analyses, surface and body loads to be deleted should be ramped to zero, or to the initial value, so
that the Jobname.ESAV and Jobname.OSAV files are consistent with the database.
For a mode-superposition transient analysis, steps 5, 6, 7, and 8 below do not apply.
Take whatever corrective action is necessary if you are restarting from a convergence failure.

5.

If you are running a linear static or linear full transient analysis (with AUTOTS,OFF and the timestep
fixed) using the sparse solver, you can realize additional savings by using the KeepFile field on the
EQSLV command. Setting KeepFile = KEEP on your initial solve will force ANSYS to keep all necessary
files from the sparse solver in the working directory. In the subsequent singleframe restart, the sparse
matrix files are available for reuse in conjunction with KUSE,1 (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads>
Other> Reuse LN22 Matrix).
By default, the ANSYS program calculates a new factorized matrix for the first load step of a restart
run. By issuing the KUSE,1 command, you can force the program to reuse the existing matrix at the
first solve of the restart and at all subsequent solves, thereby saving a significant amount of computer
Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

13

Chapter 3: Restarting a Direct Coupled-Field Analysis


time. However, you can reuse factorized files such as Jobname.LNxx only under certain conditions,
in particular if the specified DOF constraints have not changed and it is a linear analysis. See the Theory
Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for details.
By issuing KUSE,-1, you can cause ANSYS to redo the element matrices. This can be useful for debugging
analyses and for handling error cases.
Sometimes, you may have to analyze the same model for different constraint conditions, for instance
a quarter-symmetry model with symmetry-symmetry (SS), symmetry-antisymmetry (SA), antisymmetrysymmetry (AS), and antisymmetry-antisymmetry (AA) conditions. In such a situation, keep the following
points in mind:

All four cases (SS, SA, AS, AA) require a new factorized matrix.

You can use substructuring (with the constrained nodes as master DOF) to minimize computing
time. (See "Substructuring" in the Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.)

6.

Initiate the restart solution by issuing the SOLVE command. (See Obtaining the Solution for details.)

7.

Repeat steps 4 and 6 for additional load steps, if any. For static and full transient analyses, you can
also use the load step file method to create and solve multiple load steps (not supported for mode
superposition transient analyses). Use the following commands:
Command(s): LSWRITE
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Write LS File
Main Menu> Solution> Write LS File
Command(s): LSSOLVE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> From LS Files

8.

Postprocess as desired, then exit the ANSYS program.

A sample restart input listing is shown below.


! Restart run:
/FILNAME,...
! Jobname
RESUME
/SOLU
ANTYPE,,REST
! Specify restart of previous analysis
!
! Specify new loads, new load step options, etc.
! Take appropriate corrective action for nonlinear analyses.
!
SOLVE
! Initiate restart solution
SAVE
! Optional SAVE for possible subsequent singleframe restart
FINISH
!
! Postprocess as desired
!
/EXIT,NOSAV

3.1.3. Restarting a Nonlinear Analysis From an Incompatible Database


Sometimes, postprocessing is performed prior to a restart. If you issue SET and SAVE commands during this
postprocessing, the boundary conditions in your database might be altered and become inconsistent with
those needed for a restart. By default, the program saves your file automatically when you exit. At the end
of solution, the boundary conditions for the last load step are stored in the database memory. (The database
contains only one set of boundary conditions.)
A SET command in POST1 (other than SET,LAST) reads the boundary conditions for the specified results into
the database, and overwrites the database stored in memory. If you subsequently save your file or exit,
14

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

3.1.3. Restarting a Nonlinear Analysis From an Incompatible Database


ANSYS overwrites the boundary conditions in the database file with the D's and F's from the current results
file. However, to perform a restart which ramps boundary conditions from the last solved substep, you need
the boundary conditions for the last successfully solved load substep.

3.1.3.1. Re-establishing Boundary Conditions


To re-establish the correct boundary conditions for the restart, first run a "dummy" load step. The procedure
is as follows:
1.

Rename Jobname.OSAV as Jobname.ESAV.

2.

Enter the ANSYS program and specify the same jobname that was used in the initial run with /FILNAME
(Utility Menu> File> Change Jobname).

3.

Enter the SOLUTION processor using /SOLU (Main Menu> Solution), then resume the database file
using RESUME (Utility Menu> File> Resume Jobname.db).

4.

Indicate that this is a restart analysis by issuing ANTYPE,,REST (Main Menu> Solution> Restart).

5.

Respecify boundary conditions from the last substep that was successfully solved. One substep is sufficient since the solution will converge immediately.

6.

Issue SOLVE (Main Menu> Solution> Current LS or Main Menu> Solution> Run FLOTRAN).

7.

Apply final loads and load step options as desired. You will need to adjust the number of substeps (or
time step size) if this load step is a "continuation" of the previous (before the dummy) load step. Time
step numbering may be altered from your initial intent. Use a small time increment in step 6 if you
need to preserve the time step numbering (such as for a transient analysis).

8.

Continue the procedure as outlined in Restarting an Analysis.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

15

16

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Legacy Commands
Following is the archived documentation for legacy commands.

BELLOW, NLOC, LENG, STIFF, FLEX, ELEM


Defines a bellows in a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
NLOC
Node where bellows is to be placed. Defaults to current run starting point (RUN).
LENG
Length of bellows (defaults to average pipe OD).
STIFF
Axial stiffness value (defaults to that of equivalent straight pipe).
FLEX
Bending flexibility factor (defaults to 1.0).
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to bellows (defaults to the previous maximum element number (MAXEL)
+ 1).

Notes
Defines a bellows (straight-pipe element PIPE16 with adjusted specifications and loadings) at a given location
in a piping run.

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

19

20

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

BEND, NEL1, NEL2, RAD, NDIV, ESTRT, EINC


Defines a bend in a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
NEL1, NEL2
Element numbers of the two intersecting straight pipes. Defaults to the last two straight pipe elements
nearest the intersection of the last two runs.
RAD
Bend radius. If LR, use long radius standard (1.5 x nominal diameter) (default). If SR, use short radius
standard (1.0 x nominal diameter).
NDIV
Number of divisions (elements) along bend (defaults to 2). A node is generated at the end of each division.
ESTRT
Number to be assigned to first element of bend (defaults to MAXEL + 1).
EINC
Element number increment (defaults to 1).

Notes
Defines a bend of curved (elbow) pipe elements (PIPE18) in place of the intersection of two previously
defined straight pipe elements (RUN). Two new nodes are generated at the ends of the bend (at the tangency
points). A node is also generated at the center of curvature point. The two straight pipes are automatically
"shortened" to meet the ends of the bend. The bend specifications and loadings are taken from the corresponding two straight pipes. The flexibility factors are calculated from the internal pressure and EX (evaluated
at TAVE) based on the current PPRES and PTEMP command specifications when the element is generated.

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

21

22

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

BRANCH, NODE, X, Y, Z
Defines the starting point for a piping branch.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
NODE
Start branch at this node.
X, Y, Z
Start branch at this location (in the active coordinate system). Used only if NODE is not input or input
but the node itself is not previously defined. In either case a node is generated at this location and assigned the number NODE (or 1 + previous maximum node number if NODE is not input).

Notes
See the RUN command in Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17) for information relating to piping models.

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

23

24

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

FLANGE, NLOC, LENG, MASS, SIF, FLEX, ARINS, ELEM


Defines a flange in a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
NLOC
Node where flange is to be placed (as described below). Defaults to current piping run starting point.
LENG
Length of flange (defaults to larger pipe OD).
MASS
Dry mass (weight/gravity) of flange without insulation (defaults to equivalent straight pipe mass). Note
that acceleration [ACEL] must be nonzero for weight to be calculated.
SIF
Stress intensification factor (defaults to 1.0).
FLEX
Bending flexibility factor (defaults to 1.0).
ARINS
Insulation surface area (defaults to equivalent straight pipe insulation area). Units (length2) must be
consistent with the smallest unit of the system used (not mixed) regardless of the PUNIT option.
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to flange (defaults to the previous maximum element number (MAXEL)
+ 1).

Notes
Defines a flange (straight-pipe element PIPE16 with adjusted specifications and loadings) at a given location
in a piping run. (See the RUN command, and other commands described here, in Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).)
The FLANGE command is similar to the VALVE command except for a different flexibility factor default. The
location may be 1) between two adjacent colinear straight pipes, 2) between an adjacent straight pipe and
a different piping component, or 3) at the end of a straight pipe.
For Case 1, two new nodes are generated at the ends of the flange. The two straight pipes are automatically
"shortened" to meet the ends of the flange. The flange specifications and loadings are taken from the corresponding two straight pipes.
For Case 2, one new node is generated at one end of the flange. The straight pipe is automatically "shortened"
to meet this end of the flange. The other end of the flange meets the other piping component. The flange
specifications and loadings are taken from the straight pipe.
For Case 3, one new node is generated at the free end of the flange. The other end of the flange meets the
straight pipe. The flange specifications and loadings are taken from the straight pipe.

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

25

26

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

MITER, NEL1, NEL2, RAD, NDIV, ESTRT, EINC


Defines a mitered bend in a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
NEL1, NEL2
Element numbers of the two intersecting straight pipes. Defaults to the last two straight pipe elements
nearest the intersection of the last two runs.
RAD
Bend radius. If LR, use long radius standard (1.5 x OD) (default). If SR, use short radius standard (1.0 x
OD).
NDIV
Number of divisions (elements) along bend (defaults to 2). A node is generated at the end of each division.
ESTRT
Number to be assigned to first element of bend (defaults to MAXEL + 1).
EINC
Element number increment (defaults to 1).

Notes
Defines a mitered bend of piecewise straight-pipe PIPE16 elements in place of the intersection of two previously defined straight pipe elements (RUN). This command is similar to the BEND command except that
straight pipe elements are used to form the bend instead of curved (elbow) elements. (See the RUN and
BEND command descriptions in Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).)

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

27

28

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PCORRO, CTK
Specifies the allowable exterior corrosion thickness for a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
CTK
Allowable corrosion thickness.

Notes
Specifies the allowable exterior corrosion thickness for a piping run. (See the RUN command description in
Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).)

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

29

30

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PDRAG, PX1, PY1, PZ1, H1, PX2, PY2, PZ2, H2, Kcord
Defines the external fluid drag loading for a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
PX1, PY1, PZ1
External fluid drag pressure (global Cartesian components) at height H1.
H1
Height (along Kcord coordinate) for first drag pressure.
PX2, PY2, PZ2
External fluid drag pressure (global Cartesian components) at height H2.
H2
Height (along Kcord coordinate) for second drag pressure.
Kcord
Coordinate direction for height value (in the global Cartesian coordinate system):
X
X coordinate.
Y
Y coordinate (default).
Z
Z coordinate.

Notes
Defines the external fluid drag loading (pressure) as a function of height for a piping run. (See the RUN
command description in Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).) The element drag pressure is determined from
the centroid height and linear interpolation. Pressures are assigned to the elements as they are generated.

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

31

32

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PFLUID, DENS
Defines the contained fluid density for a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
DENS
Density of the contained fluid.

Notes
See the RUN command description in Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).
Distributed ANSYS Restriction

This command is not supported in Distributed ANSYS.

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

33

34

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PGAP, NLOC, K, DX, DY, DZ, GAP, ELEM


Defines a spring-gap constraint in a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
NLOC
Node where gap is to be placed. Defaults to current run starting point.
K
Spring constant value (must be positive).
DX, DY, DZ
Increment (in terms of the active coordinate system components) to determine gap ground point. Element
length must not be zero. Constraints are automatically generated at the ground point.
GAP
Gap size (defaults to the element length).
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to gap (defaults to MAXEL + 1).

Notes
Defines a spring-gap constraint (gap element CONTAC52) at a given location in a piping run. Gives spring
constraint resistance after a specified gap is closed. (See the RUN command description in Part II:Legacy
Commands (p. 17).)

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

35

36

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PINSUL, DENS, ITK


Defines the external insulation constants in a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
DENS
Insulation density.
ITK
Insulation thickness.

Command Default
No insulation.

Notes
Defines the external insulation constants in a piping run. (See the RUN command description in Part II:Legacy
Commands (p. 17).)

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

37

38

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE
Specifies "Pipe modeling" as the subsequent status topic.
PREP7:Status
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> FL EM EH DY PP <> EME MFS

Notes
This is a status topic command. If status is requested for some items, it appears in the log file (Jobname.LOG).
This command should be followed immediately by a STAT command, which reports the status for the specified
topic.

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

39

40

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

POPT, Lop1
Selects the piping analysis standard for a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Lop1
Option label:
B31.1
for ANSI B31.1.
NC
for ASME Section III NC, Class 2.

Command Default
ANSI B31.1.

Notes
Selects the piping analysis standard for a piping run (RUN). Affects only the flexibility and stress intensification
factors applied to the curved pipe elements. (See the RUN command description in Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).)

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

41

42

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PPRES, PRESS
Defines the internal pressure for a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
PRESS
Pipe internal pressure.

Notes
Defines the pipe internal pressure for a piping run (RUN). These pressures are assigned to the elements as
they are generated. (See the RUN command description in Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).)

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

43

44

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PSPEC, MAT, DNOM, SCHED, OD, TK


Defines pipe material and dimensions.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
MAT
Material number referring to a material property [MP]. Material number must be between 1 and 40.
DNOM, SCHED
Nominal diameter of pipe and schedule rating. Only valid ratings accepted. If these are specified, the
OD and TK values are found from an internal table.
Valid values for DNOM are: 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34,
and 36.
Valid ratings for SCHED are: 5, 5S, 10, 10S, 20, 30, 40, 40S, 60, 80 80S, 100, 120, 140, 160, XS, XXS, and
STD.
OD
Outer diameter of pipe (if DNOM not specified). If both DNOM and OD are not specified, OD and TK retain
their previous values.
TK
Wall thickness of pipe (if OD specified).

Notes
Defines pipe material and dimensions. (See the RUN command description in Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).)

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

45

46

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PSPRNG, NLOC, TYPE, K, DX, DY, DZ, ELEM


Defines a spring constraint in a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
NLOC
Node where spring is to be placed. Defaults to current run starting point.
TYPE
Type of spring:
TRAN
Translational (default).
ROT
Rotational.
K
Spring constant value (must be positive).
DX, DY, DZ
Increment (in terms of the active coordinate system components) to determine spring ground point.
Spring length must not be zero. Constraints are automatically generated at the ground point.
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to spring (defaults to the previous maximum element number (MAXEL
+ 1)).

Notes
Defines a spring constraint (spring element COMBIN14) at a given location in a piping run. (See the RUN
command description in Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).)

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

47

48

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PTEMP, TOUT, TIN


Defines the pipe wall temperatures in a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
TOUT
Outer pipe wall temperature. If NONE, reset temperature specification to none (BFUNIF will be assigned).
TIN
Inner pipe wall temperature (defaults to TOUT).

Command Default
Assign uniform temperature BFUNIF to elements.

Notes
Defines the pipe wall temperatures in a piping run. These temperatures are assigned to the elements as
they are generated. (See the RUN command description in Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).)

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

49

50

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PUNIT, KOPT
Selects the system of length units to be used in a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
KOPT
Units key:
0
Input units are consistent (no conversions are done) (default).
FTIN or 1
English units (feet A, inch B, fraction of inch C/D). Use A+B+C/D format for PDRAG, BRANCH, RUN,
BEND, MITER, REDUCE, VALVE, BELLOW, FLANGE, PSPRNG, and PGAP commands. Precede by "-'' sign
for negative coordinates. (Example: 5+6+7/16 for 5 ft. 6-7/16 in., +3 for 3 in., -0+3 for -3 in., +0+9/16
for 9/16 in.).
The two signs should not be consecutive. A, B, C, and D must be integers. Use B+C/D format for
PSPEC, PINSUL, and PCORRO commands. (Example: 2 for 2 in., 3+1/2 for 3-1/2 in., +3/8 for 3/8 in.)
METRIC or 2
Metric units (meter A, centimeter B, fraction of cm C/D). Use as explained for English units. (Example:
5+6+7/10 for 5 m 6-7/10 cm with PDRAG command.)

Command Default
Input units are consistent (no conversions are done).

Notes
Selects the system of length units to be used for the piping commands. Mixed length units require a + sign
to delimit (or position) the units in the system and are converted to the smallest unit of the system (inches
or centimeters) upon input.
This conversion is local only to pure length units of the piping commands listed. Other units and units for
other commands must be input to be consistent with the smallest length unit of the system used.

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

51

52

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

REDUCE, NLOC, LENG, ELEM


Defines a reducer in a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
NLOC
Node where two straight pipes intersect at center of reducer. Defaults to previous run starting point.
LENG
Length of reducer (defaults to average pipe OD).
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to reducer (defaults to MAXEL + 1).

Notes
Defines a reducer (straight-pipe element PIPE16 with averaged specifications) in place of the intersection of
two previously defined straight pipe elements in a piping run. (See the RUN command description in
Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).) Two new nodes are generated at the ends of the reducer. The two straight
pipes are automatically "shortened" to meet the ends of the reducer. The reducer specifications and loadings
are taken from the corresponding two straight pipes.

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

53

54

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

RUN, DX, DY, DZ, NDIV, NEND, ESTRT, EINC


Defines a pipe run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
DX, DY, DZ
Increment (in terms of the active coordinate system components) to determine run end point. Increment
is applied to branch starting point (BRANCH) or end point of previous run (whichever was later).
NDIV
Number of divisions (elements) along branch (defaults to 1). A node is generated at the end of each division.
NEND
Number to be assigned to end node of branch (defaults to MAXNP + NDIV).
ESTRT
Number to be assigned to first element of branch (defaults to the previous maximum element number
(MAXEL) + 1).
EINC
Element number increment (defaults to 1).

Notes
Defines a pipe run from a previous point to an incremental point. Nodes (and elements) are generated
straight (in the active coordinate system). Elements are of type PIPE16 straight pipes. Material properties,
real constants, and loads are derived from the previously defined piping specifications. Piping loads and
specifications are defined via PCORRO, PDRAG, PFLUID, PINSUL, POPT, PPRES, PSPEC, PTEMP, and PUNIT
commands.
Generated items may be listed (or displayed) with the standard commands (NLIST, ELIST, NPLOT, EPLOT,
ETLIST, RLIST, etc.).
Items may also be modified (NMODIF, EMODIF, RMODIF, etc.) or redefined as desired.
See Piping Models (p. 3) for more information.

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

55

56

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

TEE, NCENT, TYPE, ELEM, EINC, L1, L2, L3


Defines a tee in a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
NCENT
Node where three straight pipes intersect forming a tee (or "Y"). Defaults to last starting branch node
(BRANCH).
TYPE
Type of tee:
WT
Welding tee (default).
r = (D0 - tw) / 2
h = 4.4 tw/ r
SIF = 0.9 / (h2/3)
If (SIF < 1) SIF = 1
UFT
Unreinforced fabricated tee.
r = (D0 - tw) / 2
h = tw/ r
SIF = 0.9 / (h2/3)
If (SIF < 1) SIF = 1
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to first tee leg (defaults to the previous maximum element number
(MAXEL) + 1).
EINC
Element number increment (defaults to 1).
L1, L2, L3
Tee leg lengths (corresponding in order of increasing straight pipe element numbers). Must be less than
the straight pipe length. Defaults to 2 x OD of straight pipe (for each leg).

Notes
Defines a tee in place of the tee intersection of three previously defined straight pipe elements. (See the
RUN command description in Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).)
The new tee is also composed of three PIPE16 straight pipe elements, but of the leg lengths specified and
with the appropriate tee factors calculated.
Three new nodes are generated at the ends of the tee.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

57

TEE
The original three straight pipes are automatically "shortened" to meet the ends of the tee. The tee specifications and loadings are taken from the corresponding three straight pipes.

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

58

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

VALVE, NLOC, LENG, MASS, SIF, FLEX, ARINS, ELEM


Defines a valve in a piping run.
PREP7:Piping
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
NLOC
Node where valve is to be placed (as described below). Defaults to current run starting point.
LENG
Length of valve (defaults to larger pipe OD).
MASS
Dry mass (weight/gravity) of valve without insulation (defaults to equivalent straight pipe mass). Note,
acceleration (ACEL) must be nonzero for weight to be calculated.
SIF
Stress intensification factor (defaults to 1.0).
FLEX
Bending flexibility factor (defaults to 0.5).
ARINS
Insulation surface area (defaults to equivalent straight pipe insulation area). Units (length2) must be
consistent with the smallest unit of the system used (not mixed) regardless of the PUNIT option.
ELEM
Element number to be assigned to valve (defaults to the previous maximum element number (MAXEL)
+ 1).

Notes
Defines a valve (straight-pipe element PIPE16 with adjusted specifications and loadings) at a given location
in a piping run. (See the RUN command description in Part II:Legacy Commands (p. 17).) The location may
be 1) between two adjacent colinear straight pipes, 2) between an adjacent straight pipe and a different
piping component, or 3) at the end of a straight pipe.
For Case 1, two new nodes are generated at the ends of the valve. The two straight pipes are automatically
"shortened" to meet the ends of the valve. The valve specifications and loadings are taken from the corresponding two straight pipes.
For Case 2, one new node is generated at one end of the valve. The straight pipe is automatically "shortened"
to meet this end of the valve. The other end of the valve meets the other piping component. The valve
specifications and loadings are taken from the straight pipe.
For Case 3, one new node is generated at the free end of the valve. The other end of the valve meets the
straight pipe. The valve specifications and loadings are taken from the straight pipe.

Menu Paths
This command cannot be accessed from a menu.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

59

60

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Legacy Elements
Following is the archived documentation for legacy elements.

BEAM4
3-D Elastic Beam
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Product Restrictions

BEAM4 Element Description


Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a currenttechnology element such as BEAM188 (KEYOPT(3) = 3).
BEAM4 is a uniaxial element with tension, compression, torsion, and bending capabilities. The element has
six degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions and rotations about the
nodal x, y, and z axes. Stress stiffening and large deflection capabilities are included. A consistent tangent
stiffness matrix option is available for use in large deflection (finite rotation) analyses. A tapered unsymmetrical elastic beam is described in BEAM44 and a 3-D plastic beam in BEAM24.

Figure 1 BEAM4 Geometry


(If node K is omitted and

= 0,

K (optional)

the element y axis is parallel to


the global X-Y plane.)
J

Z
J

I
x

y
I

T1

T4
I

T2
x

3
T5
5

T8
J

T6

T7

z
4

1
y

IZZ

T1,T5

T4,T8

T3

2
TKZ

IYY

X
T2,T6

TKY

T3,T7

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

63

BEAM4

BEAM4 Input Data


The geometry, node locations, and coordinate systems for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 63). The
element is defined by two or three nodes, the cross-sectional area, two area moments of inertia (IZZ and
IYY), two thicknesses (TKY and TKZ), an angle of orientation () about the element x-axis, the torsional moment
of inertia (IXX), and the material properties. For stiffness purposes, the torsional moment of inertia, if IXX is
equal to 0.0 or not specified, is assumed to be equal to the polar moment of inertia (IYY + IZZ). For inertial
purposes, the torsional (rotational) moment of inertia used is the polar moment of inertia, and is therefore
not affected by the value entered for IXX. The IXX value should be positive and is usually less than the polar
moment of inertia. An added mass per unit length may be input with the ADDMAS value.
The element x-axis is oriented from node I toward node J. For the two-node option, the default ( = 0) orientation of the element y-axis is automatically calculated to be parallel to the global X-Y plane. Several orientations are shown in Figure 1 (p. 63). For the case where the element is parallel to the global Z axis (or
within a 0.01 percent slope of it), the element y axis is oriented parallel to the global Y axis (as shown). For
user control of the element orientation about the element x-axis, use the angle (THETA) or the third node
option. If both are defined, the third node option takes precedence. The third node (K), if used, defines a
plane (with I and J) containing the element x and z axes (as shown). If this element is used in a large deflection
analysis, it should be noted that the location of the third node (K), or the angle (THETA), is used only to initially
orient the element. (For information about orientation nodes and beam meshing, see Meshing Your Solid
Model in the Modeling and Meshing Guide.)
The initial strain in the element (ISTRN) is given by /L, where is the difference between the element
length, L, (as defined by the I and J node locations) and the zero strain length. The shear deflection constants
(SHEARZ and SHEARY) are used only if shear deflection is to be included. A zero value of SHEAR_ may be
used to neglect shear deflection in a particular direction. See Shear Deflection for details.
KEYOPT(2) is used to activate the consistent tangent stiffness matrix (i.e., a matrix composed of the main
tangent stiffness matrix plus the consistent stress stiffness matrix) in large deflection analyses [NLGEOM,ON].
You can often obtain more rapid convergence in a geometrically nonlinear analysis, such as a nonlinear
buckling or postbuckling analysis, by activating this option. However, you should not use this option if you
are using the element to simulate a rigid link or a group of coupled nodes. The resulting abrupt changes in
stiffness within the structure make the consistent tangent stiffness matrix unsuitable for such applications.
KEYOPT(7) is used to compute an unsymmetric gyroscopic damping matrix (often used for rotordynamic
analyses). The rotational frequency is input with the SPIN real constant (radians/time, positive in the positive
element x direction). The element must be symmetric with this option (e.g., IYY = IZZ and SHEARY = SHEARZ).
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures may be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 63). Positive normal pressures act into the
element. Lateral pressures are input as a force per unit length. End "pressures" are input as a force. Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the eight "corner" locations shown in Figure 1 (p. 63). The
first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T1.
If only T1 and T2 are input, T3 defaults to T2 and T4 defaults to T1. If only T1 and T4 are input, T2 defaults
to T1 and T3 defaults to T4. In both cases, T5 through T8 default to T1 through T4. For any other input pattern,
unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
KEYOPT(9) is used to request output at intermediate locations. It is based on equilibrium (free body of a
portion of the element) considerations and is not valid if:

stress stiffening is turned on [SSTIF,ON]

more than one component of angular velocity is applied [OMEGA]

64

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

BEAM4

any angular velocities or accelerations are applied with the CGOMGA, DOMEGA, or DCGOMG commands.

A summary of the element input is given in "BEAM4 Input Summary" (p. 65). A general description of element
input is given in Element Input.

BEAM4 Input Summary


Nodes
I, J, K (K orientation node is optional)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Real Constants
AREA, IZZ, IYY, TKZ, TKY, THETA
ISTRN, IXX, SHEARZ, SHEARY, SPIN, ADDMAS
See Table 1: BEAM4 Real Constants (p. 66) for a description of the real constants.
Material Properties
EX, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), DENS, GXY, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures -face 1 (I-J) (-Z normal direction)
face 2 (I-J) (-Y normal direction)
face 3 (I-J) (+X tangential direction)
face 4 (I) (+X axial direction)
face 5 (J) (-X axial direction)
(use negative value for opposite loading)
Body Loads
Temperatures -T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Birth and death
KEYOPT(2)
Stress stiffening option:
0 -Use only the main tangent stiffness matrix when NLGEOM is ON. (Stress stiffening effects used in
linear buckling or other linear prestressed analyses must be activated separately with PSTRES,ON.)
1 -Use the consistent tangent stiffness matrix (i.e., a matrix composed of the main tangent stiffness
matrix plus the consistent stress stiffness matrix) when NLGEOM is ON. (SSTIF,ON will be ignored
for this element when KEYOPT(2) = 1 is activated.) Note that if SOLCONTROL is ON and NLGEOM
is ON, KEYOPT(2) is automatically set to 1; i.e., the consistent tangent will be used.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

65

BEAM4
2 -Turn off consistent tangent stiffness matrix (i.e., a matrix composed of the main tangent stiffness
matrix plus the consistent stress stiffness matrix) when SOLCONTROL is ON. Sometimes it is necessary
to turn off the consistent tangent stiffness matrix if the element is used to simulate rigid bodies by
using a very large real constant number . KEYOPT(2) = 2 is the same as KEYOPT(2) = 0, however,
KEYOPT(2) = 0 is controlled by SOLCONTROL, ON or OFF, while KEYOPT(2) = 2 is independent of
SOLCONTROL.
KEYOPT(6)
Member force and moment output:
0 -No printout of member forces or moments
1 -Print out member forces and moments in the element coordinate system
KEYOPT(7)
Gyroscopic damping matrix:
0 -No gyroscopic damping matrix
1 -Compute gyroscopic damping matrix. Real constant SPIN must be greater than zero. IYY must equal
IZZ.
KEYOPT(9)
Output at intermediate points between ends I and J:
N -Output at N intermediate locations (N = 0, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9)

Table 1 BEAM4 Real Constants


No.

Name

Description

AREA

Cross-sectional area

IZZ

Area moment of inertia

IYY

Area moment of inertia

TKZ

Thickness along Z axis

TKY

Thickness along Y axis

THETA

Orientation about X axis

ISTRN

Initial strain

IXX

Torsional moment of inertia

SHEARZ

Shear deflection constant Z [1]

10

SHEARY

Shear deflection constant Y [2]

11

SPIN

Rotational frequency (required if KEYOPT(7) = 1)

12

ADDMAS

Added mass/unit length

1.

SHEARZ goes with IZZ; if SHEARZ = 0, there is no shear deflection in the element Y direction.

2.

SHEARY goes with IYY; if SHEARY = 0, there is no shear deflection in the element Z direction.

66

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

BEAM4

BEAM4 Output Data


The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution

Additional element output as shown in Table 2: BEAM4 Element Output Definitions (p. 67).

Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 67).


The maximum stress is computed as the direct stress plus the absolute values of both bending stresses. The
minimum stress is the direct stress minus the absolute value of both bending stresses. A general description
of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.

Figure 2 BEAM4 Stress Output

SBZT
x

SDIR
I

SDIR

SBYB

The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:


A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
(ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R column
indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and - indicates that the item is not available.

Table 2 BEAM4 Element Output Definitions


Name

Definition

EL

Element number

NODES

Element node number (I and J)

MAT

Material number for the element

VOLU:

Element volume

XC, YC, ZC

Location where results are reported

TEMP

Temperatures at integration points T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6,


T7, T8

PRES

Pressure P1 at nodes I, J; OFFST1 at I, J; P2 at I, J; OFFST2


at I, J; P3 at I, J; OFFST3 at I, J; P4 at I; P5 at J

SDIR

Axial direct stress

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

67

BEAM4
Name

Definition

SBYT

Bending stress on the element +Y side of the beam

SBYB

Bending stress on the element -Y side of the beam

SBZT

Bending stress on the element +Z side of the beam

SBZB

Bending stress on the element -Z side of the beam

SMAX

Maximum stress (direct stress + bending stress)

SMIN

Minimum stress (direct stress - bending stress)

EPELDIR

Axial elastic strain at the end

EPELBYT

Bending elastic strain on the element +Y side of the beam

EPELBYB

Bending elastic strain on the element -Y side of the beam

EPELBZT

Bending elastic strain on the element +Z side of the beam

EPELBZB

Bending elastic strain on the element -Z side of the beam

EPTHDIR

Axial thermal strain at the end

EPTHBYT

Bending thermal strain on the element +Y side of the beam

EPTHBYB

Bending thermal strain on the element -Y side of the beam

EPTHBZT

Bending thermal strain on the element +Z side of the beam

EPTHBZB

Bending thermal strain on the element -Z side of the beam

EPINAXL

Initial axial strain in the element

MFOR(X, Y,
Z)

Member forces in the element coordinate system X, Y, Z


directions

MMOM(X, Y,
Z)

Member moments in the element coordinate system X, Y,


Z directions

1.

The item repeats for end I, intermediate locations (see KEYOPT(9)), and end J.

2.

If KEYOPT(6) = 1.

3.

Available only at centroid as a *GET item.

The following tables list output available through the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number
method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) of the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence
Number Table of this manual for more information. The following notation is used in Table 3: BEAM4 Item
and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(9) = 0) (p. 69) through Table 8: BEAM4 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(9)
= 9) (p. 75):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: BEAM4 Element Output Definitions (p. 67)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
E
sequence number for single-valued or constant element data
I,J
sequence number for data at nodes I and J

68

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

BEAM4
ILN
sequence number for data at Intermediate Location N

Table 3 BEAM4 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(9) = 0)


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

SDIR

LS

SBYT

LS

SBYB

LS

SBZT

LS

SBZB

LS

10

EPELDIR

LEPEL

EPELBYT

LEPEL

EPELBYB

LEPEL

EPELBZT

LEPEL

EPELBZB

LEPEL

10

SMAX

NMISC

SMIN

NMISC

EPTHDIR

LEPTH

EPTHBYT

LEPTH

EPTHBYB

LEPTH

EPTHBZT

LEPTH

EPTHBZB

LEPTH

10

EPINAXL

LEPTH

11

MFORX

SMISC

MFORY

SMISC

MFORZ

SMISC

MMOMX

SMISC

10

MMOMY

SMISC

11

MMOMZ

SMISC

12

P1

SMISC

13

14

OFFST1

SMISC

15

16

P2

SMISC

17

18

OFFST2

SMISC

19

20

P3

SMISC

21

22

OFFST3

SMISC

23

24

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

69

BEAM4
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

P4

SMISC

25

P5

SMISC

26
Pseudo Node

1
TEMP

LBFE

Table 4 BEAM4 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(9) = 1)


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

IL1

SDIR

LS

11

SBYT

LS

12

SBYB

LS

13

SBZT

LS

14

SBZB

LS

10

15

EPELDIR

LEPEL

11

EPELBYT

LEPEL

12

EPELBYB

LEPEL

13

EPELBZT

LEPEL

14

EPELBZB

LEPEL

10

15

SMAX

NMISC

SMIN

NMISC

EPTHDIR

LEPTH

11

EPTHBYT

LEPTH

12

EPTHBYB

LEPTH

13

EPTHBZT

LEPTH

14

EPTHBZB

LEPTH

10

15

EPINAXL

LEPTH

16

MFORX

SMISC

13

MFORY

SMISC

14

MFORZ

SMISC

15

MMOMX

SMISC

10

16

MMOMY

SMISC

11

17

70

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

BEAM4
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

IL1

MMOMZ

SMISC

12

18

P1

SMISC

19

20

OFFST1

SMISC

21

22

P2

SMISC

23

24

OFFST2

SMISC

25

26

P3

SMISC

27

28

OFFST3

SMISC

29

30

P4

SMISC

31

P5

SMISC

32

Pseudo Node
1
TEMP

LBFE

Table 5 BEAM4 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(9) = 3)


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

IL1

IL2

IL3

SDIR

LS

11

16

21

SBYT

LS

12

17

22

SBYB

LS

13

18

23

SBZT

LS

14

19

24

SBZB

LS

10

15

20

25

EPELDIR

LEPEL

11

16

21

EPELBYT

LEPEL

12

17

22

EPELBYB

LEPEL

13

18

23

EPELBZT

LEPEL

14

19

24

EPELBZB

LEPEL

10

15

20

25

SMAX

NMISC

SMIN

NMISC

10

EPTHDIR

LEPTH

11

16

21

EPTHBYT

LEPTH

12

17

22

EPTHBYB

LEPTH

13

18

23

EPTHBZT

LEPTH

14

19

24

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

71

BEAM4
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

IL1

IL2

IL3

EPTHBZB

LEPTH

10

15

20

25

EPINAXL

LEPTH

26

MFORX

SMISC

13

19

25

MFORY

SMISC

14

20

26

MFORZ

SMISC

15

21

27

MMOMX

SMISC

10

16

22

28

MMOMY

SMISC

11

17

23

29

MMOMZ

SMISC

12

18

24

30

P1

SMISC

31

32

OFFST1

SMISC

33

34

P2

SMISC

35

36

OFFST2

SMISC

37

38

P3

SMISC

39

40

OFFST3

SMISC

41

42

P4

SMISC

43

P5

SMISC

44

Pseudo Node
1
TEMP

LBFE

Table 6 BEAM4 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(9) = 5)


Output
Quantity
Name

Item

IL1

IL2

IL3

IL4

IL5

SDIR

LS

11

16

21

26

31

SBYT

LS

12

17

22

27

32

SBYB

LS

13

18

23

28

33

SBZT

LS

14

19

24

29

34

SBZB

LS

10

15

20

25

30

35

EPELDIR

LEPEL

11

16

21

26

31

EPELBYT

LEPEL

12

17

22

27

32

EPELBYB

LEPEL

13

18

23

28

33

EPELBZT

LEPEL

14

19

24

29

34

EPELBZB

LEPEL

10

15

20

25

30

35

72

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

BEAM4
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

IL1

IL2

IL3

IL4

IL5

SMAX

NMISC

11

13

SMIN

NMISC

10

12

14

EPTHDIR

LEPTH

11

16

21

26

31

EPTHBYT

LEPTH

12

17

22

27

32

EPTHBYB

LEPTH

13

18

23

28

33

EPTHBZT

LEPTH

14

19

24

29

34

EPTHBZB

LEPTH

10

15

20

25

30

35

EPINAXL

LEPTH

36

MFORX

SMISC

13

19

25

31

37

MFORY

SMISC

14

20

26

32

38

MFORZ

SMISC

15

21

27

33

39

MMOMX

SMISC

10

16

22

28

34

40

MMOMY

SMISC

11

17

23

29

35

41

MMOMZ

SMISC

12

18

24

30

36

42

P1

SMISC

43

44

OFFST1

SMISC

45

46

P2

SMISC

47

48

OFFST2

SMISC

49

50

P3

SMISC

51

52

OFFST3

SMISC

53

54

P4

SMISC

55

P5

SMISC

56

Pseudo Node
1
TEMP

LBFE

Table 7 BEAM4 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(9) = 7)


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

IL1

IL2

IL3

IL4

IL5

IL6

IL7

SDIR

LS

11

16

21

26

31

36

41

SBYT

LS

12

17

22

27

32

37

42

SBYB

LS

13

18

23

28

33

38

43

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

73

BEAM4
Output
Quantity
Name

Item

IL1

IL2

IL3

IL4

IL5

IL6

IL7

SBZT

LS

14

19

24

29

34

39

44

SBZB

LS

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

EPELDIR

LEPEL

11

16

21

26

31

36

41

EPELBYT

LEPEL

12

17

22

27

32

37

42

EPELBYB

LEPEL

13

18

23

28

33

38

43

EPELBZT

LEPEL

14

19

24

29

34

39

44

EPELBZB

LEPEL

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

SMAX

NMISC

11

13

15

17

SMIN

NMISC

10

12

14

16

18

EPTHDIR

LEPTH

11

16

21

26

31

36

41

EPTHBYT

LEPTH

12

17

22

27

32

37

42

EPTHBYB

LEPTH

13

18

23

28

33

38

43

EPTHBZT

LEPTH

14

19

24

29

34

39

44

EPTHBZB

LEPTH

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

EPINAXL

LEPTH

46

MFORX

SMISC

13

19

25

31

37

43

49

MFORY

SMISC

14

20

26

32

38

44

50

MFORZ

SMISC

15

21

27

33

39

45

51

MMOMX

SMISC

10

16

22

28

34

40

46

52

MMOMY

SMISC

11

17

23

29

35

41

47

53

MMOMZ

SMISC

12

18

24

30

36

42

48

54

P1

SMISC

55

56

OFFST1

SMISC

57

58

P2

SMISC

59

60

OFFST2

SMISC

61

62

P3

SMISC

63

64

OFFST3

SMISC

65

66

P4

SMISC

67

P5

SMISC

68

74

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

BEAM4
Pseudo Node
1
TEMP

LBFE

Table 8 BEAM4 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(9) = 9)


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

IL1 IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7 IL8 IL9

SDIR

LS

11

16

21

26

31

36

41

46

51

SBYT

LS

12

17

22

27

32

37

42

47

52

SBYB

LS

13

18

23

28

33

38

43

48

53

SBZT

LS

14

19

24

29

34

39

44

49

54

SBZB

LS

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

EPELDIR

LEPEL

11

16

21

26

31

36

41

46

51

EPELBYT

LEPEL

12

17

22

27

32

37

42

47

52

EPELBYB

LEPEL

13

18

23

28

33

38

43

48

53

EPELBZT

LEPEL

14

19

24

29

34

39

44

49

54

EPELBZB

LEPEL

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

SMAX

NMISC

11

13

15

17

19

21

SMIN

NMISC

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

EPTHDIR

LEPTH

11

16

21

26

31

36

41

46

51

EPTHBYT

LEPTH

12

17

22

27

32

37

42

47

52

EPTHBYB

LEPTH

13

18

23

28

33

38

43

48

53

EPTHBZT

LEPTH

14

19

24

29

34

39

44

49

54

EPTHBZB

LEPTH

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

EPINAXL

LEPTH

56

MFORX

SMISC

13

19

25

31

37

43

49

55

61

MFORY

SMISC

14

20

26

32

38

44

50

56

62

MFORZ

SMISC

15

21

27

33

39

45

51

57

63

MMOMX

SMISC

10

16

22

28

34

40

46

52

58

64

MMOMY

SMISC

11

17

23

29

35

41

47

53

59

65

MMOMZ

SMISC

12

18

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

66

P1

SMISC

67

68

OFFST1

SMISC

69

70

P2

SMISC

71

72

OFFST2

SMISC

73

74

P3

SMISC

75

76

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

75

BEAM4
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

OFFST3

SMISC

77

78

P4

SMISC

79

P5

SMISC

80

IL1 IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7 IL8 IL9

Pseudo Node
1
TEMP

LBFE

BEAM4 Assumptions and Restrictions

The beam must not have a zero length or area. The moments of inertia, however, may be zero if large
deflections are not used.

The beam can have any cross-sectional shape for which the moments of inertia can be computed. The
stresses, however, will be determined as if the distance between the neutral axis and the extreme fiber
is one-half of the corresponding thickness.

The element thicknesses are used only in the bending and thermal stress calculations.

The applied thermal gradients are assumed to be linear across the thickness in both directions and
along the length of the element.

If you use the consistent tangent stiffness matrix (KEYOPT(2) = 1), take care to use realistic (that is, "to
scale") element real constants. This precaution is necessary because the consistent stress-stiffening
matrix is based on the calculated stresses in the element. If you use artificially large or small cross-sectional properties, the calculated stresses will become inaccurate, and the stress-stiffening matrix will
suffer corresponding inaccuracies. (Certain components of the stress-stiffening matrix could even
overshoot to infinity.) Similar difficulties could arise if unrealistic real constants are used in a linear
prestressed or linear buckling analysis [PSTRES,ON].

Eigenvalues calculated in a gyroscopic modal analysis can be very sensitive to changes in the initial
shift value, leading to potential error in either the real or imaginary (or both) parts of the eigenvalues.

BEAM4 Product Restrictions


When used in the product(s) listed below, the stated product-specific restrictions apply to this element in
addition to the general assumptions and restrictions given in the previous section.
ANSYS Professional

The SPIN real constant (R11) is not available. Input R11 as a blank.

The DAMP material property is not allowed.

KEYOPT(2) can only be set to 0 (default).

KEYOPT(7) can only be set to 0 (default).

The only special features allowed are stress stiffening and large deflections.

76

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

CONTAC12
2-D Point-to-Point Contact
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Product Restrictions

CONTAC12 Element Description


Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a current-technology element such as CONTA178.To use CONTA178 as you would CONTAC12, constrain the UZ degree of
freedom to simulate 2-D behavior. CONTA178 does not support the circular gap option of CONTAC12.
CONTAC12 represents two surfaces which may maintain or break physical contact and may slide relative to
each other. The element is capable of supporting only compression in the direction normal to the surfaces
and shear (Coulomb friction) in the tangential direction. The element has two degrees of freedom at each
node: translations in the nodal x and y directions.
The element may be initially preloaded in the normal direction or it may be given a gap specification. A
specified stiffness acts in the normal and tangential directions when the gap is closed and not sliding.

Figure 1 CONTAC12 Geometry


I

<0

Lo
n

>0

determines element

n
J

orientation

(or axial)

I
Nodes may be coincident

Positive Slide
(STAT or START = +2)

X (or radial)

CONTAC12 Input Data


The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 77). The
element is defined by two nodes, an angle to define the interface, two stiffnesses (KN and KS), an initial
displacement interference or gap (INTF), and an initial element status (START). An element coordinate system
(s-n) is defined on the interface. The angle (THETA) is input (or calculated) in degrees and is measured
from the global X axis to the element s-axis. The orientation of the interface may be defined (KEYOPT(2)) by
THETA or by the node locations.
The normal stiffness, KN, should be based upon the stiffness of the surfaces in contact. See Performing a
Node-to-Node Contact Analysis in the Contact Technology Guide for guidelines on choosing a value for KN.
In some cases (such as initial interference analyses, nonconvergence, or over penetration), it may be useful
to change the KN value between load steps or in a restart in order to obtain an accurate, converged solution.
The sticking stiffness, KS, represents the stiffness in the tangential direction when elastic Coulomb friction
is selected ( > 0.0 and KEYOPT(1) = 0). The coefficient of friction is input as material property MU and is
evaluated at the average of the two node temperatures. Stiffnesses may also be computed from the maximum

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

77

CONTAC12
expected force divided by the maximum allowable surface displacement. KS defaults to KN. Stiffnesses should
be on a full 360 basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
The initial displacement interference, , defines the displacement interference (if positive) or the gap size
(if negative). The value may be input as a real constant (INTF) or automatically calculated from the input
node locations if KEYOPT(4) = 1. Stiffness is associated with a zero or positive interference. The initial element
status (START) is used to define the "previous" condition of the interface to be used at the start of the first
substep. This input is used to override the condition implied by the interference specification and is useful
in anticipating the final interface configuration and in reducing the number of iterations required for convergence.
The force deflection relationships for the interface element can be separated into the normal and tangential
(sliding) directions as shown in Figure 2 (p. 81). The element condition at the beginning of the first substep
is determined from the START parameter. If the interface is open, no stiffness is associated with this element
for this substep. If the interface is closed and sticking, KN is used in the gap resistance and KS is used in the
sliding resistance. If the interface is closed but sliding, KN is used in the gap resistance and the limit friction
force FN is used for the sliding resistance.
In the normal direction, when the normal force (FN) is negative, the interface remains in contact and responds
as a linear spring. As the normal force becomes positive, contact is broken and no force is transmitted.
KEYOPT(3) can be used to specify a "weak spring" across an open interface, which is useful for preventing
rigid body motion that could occur in a static analysis. The weak spring stiffness is computed by multiplying
the normal stiffness KN by a reduction factor. The default reduction factor of 1E-6 can be overridden with
real constant REDFACT.
In the tangential direction, for FN < 0 and the absolute value of the tangential force (FS) less than (|FN|),
the interface sticks and responds as a linear spring in the tangential direction. For FN < 0 and FS = |FN|,
sliding occurs.
If KEYOPT(1) = 1, rigid Coulomb friction is selected, KS is not used, and the elastic sticking capability is removed. This option is useful for displacement controlled problems or for certain dynamic problems where
sliding dominates. With this option, no tangential resistance is assumed for the first substep.
The only material property used is the interface coefficient of friction MU. A zero value should be used for
frictionless surfaces. Temperatures may be input at the element nodes (for material property evaluation
only). The node I temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. The node J temperature defaults to T(I). The circular
gap option (KEYOPT(2)) is useful where the final contact point (and thus the orientation angle) is not known,
such as with concentric cylinders. With this option the angular orientation THETA is initially set to 0.0 and
then internally calculated from the relative displacements of the nodes at the end of the substep for use in
the next substep. The user specified THETA (if any) is ignored. A negative interference (gap) and a zero
coefficient of friction is used with this option.
For analyses involving friction, using NROPT,UNSYM is useful (and, in fact, sometimes required) for problems
where the normal and tangential (sliding) motions are strongly coupled, such as in a wedge insertion
problem.
A summary of the element input is given in "CONTAC12 Input Summary" (p. 79). A general description of
element input is given in Element Input.

78

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

CONTAC12

CONTAC12 Input Summary


Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
See Table 1: CONTAC12 Real Constants (p. 80) for details on these real constants
Material Properties
MU
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures -T(I), T(J)
Special Features
Nonlinear
Adaptive descent
KEYOPT(1)
Type of friction (only with MU > 0.0):
0 -Elastic coulomb friction (KS used for sticking stiffness)
1 -Rigid coulomb friction (resisting force only)
KEYOPT(2)
Orientation angle:
0 -Orientation angle based on Theta real constant
1 -Circular gap option (THETA orientation determined from direction of motion) (ignore THETA real
constant)
KEYOPT(3)
Weak spring across open gap:
0 -No weak spring across an open gap
1 -Use a weak spring across an open gap
KEYOPT(4)
Interference or gap:
0 -Interference (or gap) based on INTF real constant
1 -Interference (or gap) based on initial node locations (ignore INTF real constant)

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

79

CONTAC12
KEYOPT(7)
Element level time incrementation control. Note that this option should be activated first at the procedure
level if SOLCONTROL is ON. SOLCONTROL,ON,ON is the most frequent usage with this element. If
SOLCONTROL,ON,OFF, this keyoption is not activated.
0 -Predictions are made to achieve the minimum time (or load) increment whenever a change in contact
status occurs
1 -Predictions are made to maintain a reasonable time (or load) increment (recommended)

Table 1 CONTAC12 Real Constants


No.

Name

Description

THETA

Interference angle

KN

Normal stiffness

INTF

Initial displacement interference or gap. A negative INTF (interference) assumes an initially open gap.

START

Initial element status


If = 0.0 or blank, initial condition of gap status is determined
from real constant INTF
If = 1.0, gap is initially closed and not sliding (if MU 0.0), or
sliding node J is positive (if MU = 0.0)
If = 2.0, gap is initially closed and node J is sliding to the right
of node I
If = -2.0, gap is initially closed and node J is sliding to the left
of node I
If = 3.0, gap is initially open

KS

Sticking stiffness

REDFACT

KN reduction factor

CONTAC12 Output Data


The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:

nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution

additional element output as shown in Table 2: CONTAC12 Element Output Definitions (p. 81).

Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 81).


The value of USEP is determined from the normal displacement (un) (in the element x-direction) between
the interface nodes at the end of this substep. That is: USEP = (un) J - (un) I - . This value is used in determining the normal force, FN. For an axisymmetric analysis, the element forces are expressed on a full 360
basis. The value represented by UT is the total translational displacement. The maximum value printed for
the sliding force, FS, is |FN|. STAT describes the status of the element at the end of this substep. If STAT =
1, the gap is closed and no sliding occurs. If STAT = 3, the gap is open. A value of STAT = +2 indicates the
node J slides positive relative to node I as shown in Figure 4.12-1. STAT = -2 indicates a negative slide. For
a frictionless surface ( = 0.0), the element status is either STAT = 2 or 3. The value of THETA is either the

80

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

CONTAC12
input orientation angle (if KEYOPT(2) = 0), or the calculated angle (if KEYOPT(2) = 1). A general description
of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.

Figure 2 CONTAC12 Force-Deflection Relationship


FN

FS

| FN |
KS
1

(un)J - (un)I -

(us)J - (us)I

KN
1
-

| FN |

For FN < 0, and no


reversed loading

(b)

(a)

The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:


A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
(ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R column
indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and - indicates that the item is not available.

Table 2 CONTAC12 Element Output Definitions


Name

Definition

EL

Element Number

NODES

Nodes - I, J

XC, YC

Location where results are reported

TEMP

Temperatures T(I), T(J)

USEP

Gap size or interference

FN

Normal force

STAT

Element status

OLDST

Stat value of the previous time step

THETA

Orientation angle

MU

Coefficient of friction

UT

Relative displacement in tangential direction


(positive for node J moving to right of node I)

FS

Tangential force

1.

Element status values:


1 - Contact, no sliding

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

81

CONTAC12
2 - Sliding contact with node J moving to right of node I
-2 - Sliding contact with node J moving to left of node I
3 - Gap open
2.

Only if MU > 0.0 and KEYOPT(2) = 0.

3.

Available only at centroid as a *GET item.

Table 3: CONTAC12 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 82) lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) of the Basic Analysis Guide and
The Item and Sequence Number Table of this manual for more information. The following notation is used
in Table 3: CONTAC12 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 82):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: CONTAC12 Element Output Definitions (p. 81)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
E
sequence number for single-valued or constant element data

Table 3 CONTAC12 Item and Sequence Numbers


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and
ESOL Command
Input
Item

FN

SMISC

FS

SMISC

STAT

NMISC

OLDST

NMISC

USEP

NMISC

UT

NMISC

MU

NMISC

THETA

NMISC

CONTAC12 Assumptions and Restrictions

The 2-D interface element must be defined in an X-Y plane and the Y-axis must be the axis of symmetry
for axisymmetric analyses. An axisymmetric structure should be modeled in the +X quadrants.

The element operates bilinearly only in a static or a nonlinear transient dynamic analysis.

If used in other analysis types, the element maintains its initial status throughout the analysis.

The element is nonlinear and requires an iterative solution.

Convergence is also based on forces when friction or the circular gap option is present.

Nodes I and J may be coincident since the orientation of the interface is defined only by the angle
THETA.

82

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

CONTAC12

The orientation of the interface does not change (with KEYOPT(2) = 0) during a large deflection analysis.
Use CONTA175 if this effect is desired.

No moment effects due to noncoincident nodes are included. That is, if the nodes are offset from a line
perpendicular to the interface, moment equilibrium may not be satisfied.

The element is defined such that a positive normal displacement (in the element coordinate system)
of node J relative to node I tends to open the gap, as shown in Figure 1 (p. 77). If, for a given set of
conditions, node I and J are interchanged, or if the interface is rotated by 180, the gap element acts
as a hook element, i.e., the gap closes as the nodes separate. The element may have rotated nodal coordinates since a displacement transformation into the element coordinate system is included.

The element stiffness KN cannot be exactly zero.

Unreasonably high stiffness values also should be avoided.

The rate of convergence decreases as the stiffness increases. Note that, although it is permissible to
change KN, it is not permissible to change any other real constants between load steps. Therefore, if
you plan to change KN, you cannot allow the value of KS to be defined by default, because the program
would then attempt to redefine KS as KN changed.

You must explicitly define KS whenever KN changes, to maintain a consistent value throughout all load
steps.

The element may not be deactivated with the EKILL command.

If is nonzero, the element is nonconservative as well as nonlinear. Nonconservative elements require


that the load be applied very gradually, along the actual load history path, and in the proper sequence
(if multiple loadings exist).

CONTAC12 Product Restrictions


When used in the product(s) listed below, the stated product-specific restrictions apply to this element in
addition to the general assumptions and restrictions given in the previous section.
ANSYS Professional

This element is frictionless. Specifically, MU is not allowed as a material property and KS is not allowed
as a real constant.

Temperature body loads are not applicable.

KEYOPT(1) is not applicable.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

83

84

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE16
Elastic Straight Pipe
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Product Restrictions

PIPE16 Element Description


Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a current-technology element such as PIPE288.
PIPE16 is a uniaxial element with tension-compression, torsion, and bending capabilities. The element has
six degrees of freedom at two nodes: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions and rotations about the
nodal x, y, and z axes. See PIPE16 - Elastic Straight Pipe (p. 192) for more details about this element.

Figure 1 PIPE16 Geometry


If node K is omitted, the element y-axis
is parallel to the global X-Y plane
Z

K
J

T90

x
2
z

Pout

Tavg

PX

y
3

T180

PY

Pint

J
x

PZ

z
x

Tout

y
z

Tin

x, y, z defines the element


coordinate system orientation

PIPE16 Input Data


The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 85). The
element input data include two or three nodes, the pipe outer diameter and wall thickness, stress intensification and flexibility factors, internal fluid density, exterior insulation density and thickness, corrosion thickness
allowance, insulation surface area, pipe wall mass, axial pipe stiffness, rotordynamic spin, and the isotropic
material properties.
The element X-axis is oriented from node I toward node J. For the two-node option, the element Y-axis is
automatically calculated to be parallel to the global X-Y plane. Several orientations are shown in Figure

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

85

PIPE16
1 (p. 85). For the case where the element is parallel to the global Z-axis (or within a 0.01 percent slope of
it), the element Y-axis is oriented parallel to the global Y-axis (as shown). For user control of the element
orientation about the element X-axis, use the third node option. The third node (K), if used, defines a plane
(with I and J) containing the element X and Z axes (as shown). Input and output locations around the pipe
circumference identified as being at 0 are located along the element Y-axis, and similarly 90 is along the
element Z-axis.
The stress intensification factor (SIF) modifies the bending stress. Stress intensification factors may be input
at end I (SIFI) and end J (SIFJ), if KEYOPT(2) = 0, or determined by the program using a tee-joint calculation
if KEYOPT(2) = 1, 2, or 3. SIF values less than 1.0 are set equal to 1.0. The flexibility factor (FLEX) is divided
into the cross-sectional moment of inertia to produce a modified moment of inertia for the bending stiffness
calculation. FLEX defaults to 1.0 but may be input as any positive value.
The element mass is calculated from the pipe wall material, the external insulation, and the internal fluid.
The insulation and the fluid contribute only to the element mass matrix. The corrosion thickness allowance
contributes only to the stress calculations. A positive wall mass real constant overrides the pipe wall mass
calculation. A nonzero insulation area real constant overrides the insulation surface area calculation (from
the pipe outer diameter and length). A nonzero stiffness real constant overrides the calculated axial pipe
stiffness.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures may be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 85). Internal pressure (PINT) and external
pressure (POUT) are input as positive values. The internal and external pressure loads are designed for closedloop static pressure environments and therefore include pressure loads on fictitious "end caps" so that the
pressure loads induce an axial stress and/or reaction in the pipe system. If a dynamic situation needs to be
represented, such as a pipe venting to a lower pressure area or the internal flow is past a constriction in the
pipe, these end cap loads may need to be modified by applying a nodal force normal to the cross-section
of the pipe with the magnitude representing the change in pressure. Alternatively, the precomputed end
cap loads can be removed using KEYOPT(8) = 1 and the appropriate end cap loads added by the user. The
transverse pressures (PX, PY, and PZ) may represent wind or drag loads (per unit length of the pipe) and
are defined in the global Cartesian directions. Positive transverse pressures act in the positive coordinate
directions. The normal component or the projected full pressure may be used (KEYOPT(5)). Tapered pressures
are not recognized. Only constant pressures are supported for this element. See PIPE16 - Elastic Straight
Pipe (p. 192) for more information.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. Temperatures may have wall gradients or
diametral gradients (KEYOPT(1)). The average wall temperature at = 0 is computed as 2 * TAVG - T(180)
and the average wall temperature at = -90 is computed as 2 * TAVG - T(90). The element temperatures
are assumed to be linear along the length. The first temperature at node I (TOUT(I) or TAVG(I)) defaults to
TUNIF. If all temperatures after the first are unspecified, they default to the first. If all temperatures at node
I are input, and all temperatures at node J are unspecified, the node J temperatures default to the corresponding node I temperatures. For any other pattern of input temperatures, unspecified temperatures default
to TUNIF.
For piping analyses, the PIPE module of PREP7 may be used to generate the input for this element. KEYOPT(4)
is used to identify the element type for output labeling and for postprocessing operations.
KEYOPT(7) is used to compute an unsymmetric gyroscopic damping matrix (often used for rotordynamic
analyses). The rotational frequency is input with the SPIN real constant (radians/time, positive in the positive
element x direction).

86

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE16
A summary of the element input is given in "PIPE16 Input Summary" (p. 87). A general description of element
input is given in Element Input.

PIPE16 Input Summary


Nodes
I, J, K (K, the orientation node, is optional)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Real Constants
OD, TKWALL, SIFI, SIFJ, FLEX, DENSFL,
DENSIN, TKIN, TKCORR, AREAIN, MWALL, STIFF,
SPIN
See Table 1: PIPE16 Real Constants (p. 89) for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
EX, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX),
PRXY (or NUXY), DENS, GXY, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures -1-PINT, 2-PX, 3-PY, 4-PZ, 5-POUT
Body Loads
Temperatures -TOUT(I), TIN(I), TOUT(J), TIN(J) if KEYOPT (1) = 0, or
TAVG(I), T90(I), T180(I), TAVG(J), T90(J), T180(J) if KEYOPT (1) = 1
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
Temperatures represent:
0 -The through-wall gradient
1 -The diametral gradient
KEYOPT(2)
Stress intensification factors:
0 -Stress intensity factors from SIFI and SIFJ
1 -Stress intensity factors at node I from tee joint calculation
2 -Stress intensity factors at node J from tee joint calculation

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

87

PIPE16
3 -Stress intensity factors at both nodes from tee joint calculation
KEYOPT(4)
Element identification (for output and postprocessing):
0 -Straight pipe
1 -Valve
2 -Reducer
3 -Flange
4 -Expansion joint
5 -Mitered bend
6 -Tee branch
KEYOPT(5)
PX, PY, and PZ transverse pressures:
0 -Use only the normal component of pressure
1 -Use the full pressure (normal and shear components)
KEYOPT(6)
Member force and moment output:
0 -Do not print member forces or moments
2 -Print member forces and moments in the element coordinate system
KEYOPT(7)
Gyroscopic damping matrix:
0 -No gyroscopic damping matrix
1 -Compute gyroscopic damping matrix. Real constant SPIN must be greater than zero. DENSFL and
DENSIN must be zero.

Note
The real constant MWALL is not used to compute the gyroscopic damping matrix.
KEYOPT(8)
End cap loads:

88

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE16
0 -Internal and external pressures cause loads on end caps
1 -Internal and external pressures do not cause loads on end caps

Table 1 PIPE16 Real Constants


No.

Name

Description

OD

Pipe outer diameter

TKWALL

Wall thickness

SIFI

Stress intensification factor (node I)

SIFJ

Stress intensification factor (node J)

FLEX

Flexibility factor

DENSFL

Internal fluid density

DENSIN

Exterior insulation density

TKIN

Insulation thickness

TKCORR

Corrosion thickness allowance

10

AREAIN

Insulation surface area (replaces program-calculated value)

11

MWALL

Pipe wall mass (replaces program-calculated value)

12

STIFF

Axial pipe stiffness (replaces program-calculated value)

13

SPIN

Rotordynamic spin (required if KEYOPT(7) = 1)

PIPE16 Output Data


The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution

Additional element output as shown in Table 2: PIPE16 Element Output Definitions (p. 90)

Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 90).


The direct stress (SAXL) includes the internal pressure (closed end) effect. The direct stress does not include
the axial component of the transverse thermal stress (STH). The principal stresses and the stress intensity
include the shear force stress component, and are based on the stresses at the two extreme points on opposite sides of the neutral axis. These quantities are computed at the outer surface and might not occur at
the same location around the pipe circumference. Angles listed in the output are measured as shown () in
Figure 2 (p. 90). A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis
Guide for ways to view results.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

89

PIPE16

Figure 2 PIPE16 Stress Output

Torsional
Moment

SBEND
J

ST

SAXL

SH

SDIR

Shear
Force

The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:


A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
(ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R column
indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and - indicates that the item is not available.

Table 2 PIPE16 Element Output Definitions


Name

Definition

EL

Element Number

NODES

Nodes - I, J

MAT

Material number

VOLU:

Volume

XC, YC, ZC

Location where results are reported

CORAL

Corrosion thickness allowance

TEMP

TOUT(I), TIN(I), TOUT(J), TIN(J)

TEMP

TAVG(I), T90(I), T180(I), TAVG(J), T90(J), T180(J)

PRES

PINT, PX, PY, PZ, POUT

SFACTI, SFACTJ

Stress intensification factors at nodes I and J

STH

Stress due to maximum thermal gradient through


the wall thickness

SPR2

Hoop pressure stress for code calculations

SMI, SMJ

Moment stress at nodes I and J for code calculations

SDIR

Direct (axial) stress

SBEND

Maximum bending stress at outer surface

ST

Shear stress at outer surface due to torsion

SSF

Shear stress due to shear force

S:(1MX, 3MN, INTMX, EQVMX)

Maximum principal stress, minimum principal stress,


maximum stress intensity, maximum equivalent

90

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE16
Name

Definition

stress (over eight points on the outside surface at


both ends of the element)
S:(AXL, RAD, H, XH)

Axial, radial, hoop, and shear stresses

S:(1, 3, INT, EQV)

Maximum principal stress, minimum principal stress,


stress intensity, equivalent stress

EPEL:(AXL, RAD, H,
XH)

Axial, radial, hoop, and shear strains

EPTH:(AXL, RAD, H)

Axial, radial, and hoop thermal strain

MFOR:(X, Y, Z)

Member forces for nodes I and J (in the element


coordinate system)

MMOM:(X, Y, Z)

Member moments for nodes I and J (in the element


coordinate system)

1.

If the value is greater than 0.

2.

If KEYOPT(1) = 0

3.

If KEYOPT(1) = 1

4.

The item repeats at 0, 45, 90, 135, 180, 225, 270, 315 at node I, then at node J, all at the outer
surface.

5.

If KEYOPT(6) = 2

6.

Available only at centroid as a *GET item.

The following tables list output available through the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number
method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence
Number Table of this manual for more information. The following notation is used in Table 3: PIPE16 Item
and Sequence Numbers (Node I) (p. 91) through Table 5: PIPE16 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 93):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: PIPE16 Element Output Definitions (p. 90)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
E
sequence number for single-valued or constant element data
I, J
sequence number for data at nodes I and J

Table 3 PIPE16 Item and Sequence Numbers (Node I)


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Circumferential Location
Item

SAXL

LS

SRAD
SH

45

90

135 180 225 270 315

13

17

21

25

29

LS

10

14

18

22

26

30

LS

11

15

19

23

27

31

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

91

PIPE16
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Circumferential Location
Item

SXH

LS

EPELAXL

45

90

135 180 225 270 315

12

16

20

24

28

32

LEPEL

13

17

21

25

29

EPELRAD

LEPEL

10

14

18

22

26

30

EPELH

LEPEL

11

15

19

23

27

31

EPELXH

LEPEL

12

16

20

24

28

32

EPTHAXL

LEPTH

13

17

21

25

29

EPTHRAD

LEPTH

10

14

18

22

26

30

EPTHH

LEPTH

11

15

19

23

27

31

MFORX

SMISC

MFORY

SMISC

MFORZ

SMISC

MMOMX

SMISC

MMOMY

SMISC

MMOMZ

SMISC

SDIR

SMISC

13

ST

SMISC

14

S1

NMISC

11

16

21

26

31

36

S3

NMISC

13

18

23

28

33

38

SINT

NMISC

14

19

24

29

34

39

SEQV

NMISC

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SBEND

NMISC

90

SSF

NMISC

91

TOUT

LBFE

TIN

LBFE

Table 4 PIPE16 Item and Sequence Numbers (Node J)


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Circumferential Location
Item

SAXL

LS

SRAD

45

90

33

37

41

45

49

53

57

61

LS

34

38

42

46

50

54

58

62

SH

LS

35

39

43

47

51

55

59

63

SXH

LS

36

40

44

48

52

56

60

64

EPELAXL

LEPEL

33

37

41

45

49

53

57

61

92

135 180 225 270 315

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE16
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Circumferential Location
Item

EPELRAD

LEPEL

EPELH

45

90

135 180 225 270 315

34

38

42

46

50

54

58

62

LEPEL

35

39

43

47

51

55

59

63

EPELXH

LEPEL

36

40

44

48

52

56

60

64

EPTHAXL

LEPTH

33

37

41

45

49

53

57

61

EPTHRAD

LEPTH

34

38

42

46

50

54

58

62

EPTHH

LEPTH

35

39

43

47

51

55

59

63

MFORX

SMISC

MFORY

SMISC

MFORZ

SMISC

MMOMX

SMISC

10

MMOMY

SMISC

11

MMOMZ

SMISC

12

SDIR

SMISC

15

ST

SMISC

16

S1

NMISC

41

46

51

56

61

66

71

76

S3

NMISC

43

48

53

58

63

68

73

78

SINT

NMISC

44

49

54

59

64

69

74

79

SEQV

NMISC

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

SBEND

NMISC

92

SSF

NMISC

93

TOUT

LBFE

12

10

11

TIN

LBFE

16

13

14

15

Table 5 PIPE16 Item and Sequence Numbers


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and
ESOL Command
Input
Item

STH

SMISC

17

PINT

SMISC

18

PX

SMISC

19

PY

SMISC

20

PZ

SMISC

21

POUT

SMISC

22

SFACTI

NMISC

81

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

93

PIPE16
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and
ESOL Command
Input
Item

SFACTJ

NMISC

82

SPR2

NMISC

83

SMI

NMISC

84

SMJ

NMISC

85

S1MX

NMISC

86

S3MN

NMISC

87

SINTMX

NMISC

88

SEQVMX

NMISC

89

PIPE16 Assumptions and Restrictions

The pipe must not have a zero length or wall thickness. In addition, the OD must not be less than or
equal to zero, the ID must not be less than zero, and the corrosion thickness allowance must be less
than the wall thickness.

The element temperatures are assumed to vary linearly along the length.

The element may be used for both thin and thick-walled situations; however, some of the stress calculations are based on thin-wall theory.

The pipe element is assumed to have "closed ends" so that the axial pressure effect is included.

Shear deflection capability is also included in the element formulation.

Eigenvalues calculated in a gyroscopic modal analysis can be very sensitive to changes in the initial
shift value, leading to potential error in either the real or imaginary (or both) parts of the eigenvalues.

PIPE16 Product Restrictions


When used in the product(s) listed below, the stated product-specific restrictions apply to this element in
addition to the general assumptions and restrictions given in the previous section.
ANSYS Professional

The SPIN real constant (R13) is not available.

The DAMP material property is not allowed.

The only special features allowed are stress stiffening and large deflections.

KEYOPT(7) (gyroscopic damping) is not allowed.

94

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE18
Elastic Curved Pipe
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Product Restrictions

PIPE18 Element Description


Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a current-technology element such as ELBOW290.
PIPE18, also known as an elbow element, is a circularly uniaxial element with tension, compression, torsion,
and bending capabilities. The element has six degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x,
y, and z directions and rotations about the nodal x, y, and z axes.
Options are available to include various flexibility and stress intensification factors in the formulation. The
element can account for insulation, contained fluid, and a corrosion allowance. See PIPE18 - Elastic Curved
Pipe (p. 203) for more details about this element.

Figure 1 PIPE18 Geometry


The element x-z coordinates
are in the I, J, K plane
J

Radius of
2

Curvature

T90

Px

Pout

Tavg

1
T180

Pint

z
Py

x
I

Pz
4

Tin
Tout

PIPE18 Input Data


The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 95). The
element input data include three nodes, the pipe outer diameter, wall thickness, radius of curvature, optional
stress intensification and flexibility factors, internal fluid density, exterior insulation density and thickness,
corrosion thickness allowance, and the isotropic material properties. The internal fluid and external insulation
constants are used only to determine the added mass effects for these components.
Although the curved pipe element has only two endpoints (nodes I and J), the third node (K) is required to
define the plane in which the element lies. This node must lie in the plane of the curved pipe and on the
center-of-curvature side of line I-J. A node point belonging to another element (such as the other node of

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

95

PIPE18
a connecting straight pipe element) may be used. Input and output locations around the pipe circumference
identified as being at 0 are located along the element y-axis, and similarly 90 is along the element z-axis.
Only the lumped mass matrix is available.
The flexibility and stress intensification factors included in the element are calculated as follows:
ANSYS Flexibility Factor = 1.65/(h(1 + PrXk/tE)) or 1.0 (whichever is greater) (used if KEYOPT(3)
= 0 or 1 and FLXI not input)
Karman Flexibility Factor = (10 + 12h2)/(1 + 12h2) (used if KEYOPT(3) = 2 and FLXI not input)
User Defined Flexibility Factors = FLXI (in-plane) and FLXO (out-of-plane) (may be input as
any positive value)
FLXO defaults to FLXI for all cases.
Stress Intensification Factor = 0.9/h2/3 or 1.0 (whichever is greater) (used for SIFI or SIFJ if
factor not input or if input less than 1.0 (must be positive))
where:
h = tR/r2
t = thickness
R = radius of curvature
r = average radius
E = modulus of elasticity
Xk = 6 (r/t)4/3 (R/r)1/3 if KEYOPT(3) = 1 and R/r 1.7, otherwise Xk = 0
P = Pi - Po if Pi - Po > 0, otherwise P = 0, Pi = internal pressure, Po = external pressure
Do not use KEYOPT(3) = 1 if the included angle of the complete elbow is less than 360/((R/r)) degrees.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures may be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 95). Internal pressure (PINT) and external
pressure (POUT) are input as positive values. The internal and external pressure loads are designed for closedloop static pressure environments and therefore include pressure loads on fictitious "end caps" so that the
pressure loads induce an axial stress and/or reaction in the pipe system. If a dynamic situation needs to be
represented, such as a pipe venting to a lower pressure area or the internal flow is past a constriction in the
pipe, these end cap loads may need to be modified by applying a nodal force normal to the cross-section
of the pipe with the magnitude representing the change in pressure. Alternatively, the precomputed end
cap loads can be removed using KEYOPT(8) = 1 and the appropriate end cap loads added by the user. Note
that when using KEYOPT(8) = 1, the pressure load will be acting on only the wall of the elbow element so
that the total pressure load will not be self-equilibrating. The transverse pressures (PX, PY, and PZ) may
represent wind or drag loads (per unit length of the pipe) and are defined in the global Cartesian directions.
Positive transverse pressures act in the positive coordinate directions. Tapered pressures are not recognized.
Only constant pressures are supported for this element.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. Temperatures may have wall gradients or
diametral gradients (KEYOPT(1)). The average wall temperature at = 0 is computed as 2 * TAVG - T(180)
and the average wall temperature at = -90 is computed as 2 * TAVG - T(90). The element temperatures
are assumed to be linear along the length. The first temperature at node I (TOUT(I) or TAVG(I)) defaults to
TUNIF. If all temperatures after the first are unspecified, they default to the first. If all temperatures at node

96

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE18
I are input, and all temperatures at node J are unspecified, the node J temperatures default to the corresponding node I temperatures. For any other pattern of input temperatures, unspecified temperatures default
to TUNIF.
For piping analyses, the PIPE module of PREP7 may be used to generate the input for this element.
A summary of the element input is given below. A general description of element input is given in Element
Input.

PIPE18 Input Summary


Nodes
I, J, K - where node K is in the plane of the elbow, on the center of curvature side of line I-J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Real Constants
OD, TKWALL, RADCUR, SIFI, SIFJ, FLXI,
DENSFL, DENSIN, TKIN, TKCORR, (Blank), FLXO
See Table 1: PIPE18 Real Constants (p. 98) for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
EX, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), PRXY (or NUXY), DENS, GXY, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures -1-PINT, 2-PX, 3-PY, 4-PZ, 5-POUT
Body Loads
Temperatures -TOUT(I), TIN(I), TOUT(J), TIN(J) if KEYOPT (1) = 0, or
TAVG(I), T90(I), T180(I), TAVG(J), T90(J), T180(J) if KEYOPT (1) = 1
Special Features
Large deflection
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
Temperatures represent:
0 -The through-wall gradient
1 -The diametral gradient
KEYOPT(3)
Flex factor (if FLEX is not specified):
0 -Use ANSYS flexibility factor (without pressure term)
1 -Use ANSYS flexibility factor (with pressure term)

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

97

PIPE18
2 -Use KARMAN flexibility factor
KEYOPT(6)
Member force and moment output:
0 -Do not print member forces or moments
2 -Print member forces and moments in the element coordinate system
KEYOPT(8)
End cap loads:
0 -Internal and external pressures cause loads on end caps
1 -Internal and external pressures do not cause loads on end caps

Table 1 PIPE18 Real Constants


No.

Name

Description

OD

Pipe outer diameter

TKWALL

Wall thickness

RADCUR

Radius of curvature

SIFI

Stress intensification factor (node I)

SIFJ

Stress intensification factor (node J)

FLXI

Flexibility factor (in-plane)

DENSFL

Internal fluid density

DENSIN

Exterior insulation density

TKIN

Insulation thickness

10

TKCORR

Corrosion thickness allowance

11

(Blank)

--

12

FLXO

Flexibility factor (out-of-plane). FLXO defaults to FLXI in all cases.

PIPE18 Output Data


The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution

Additional element output as shown in Table 2: PIPE18 Element Output Definitions (p. 99)

Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 99).


The stresses are computed with the outer diameter of the pipe reduced by twice the corrosion thickness
allowance. The direct stress includes the internal pressure (closed end) effect. Also printed for each end are
the maximum and minimum principal stresses and the stress intensity. These quantities are computed at
the outer surface and may not occur at the same location around the pipe circumference. Some of these
stresses are shown in Figure 2 (p. 99). The direct stress does not include the axial component of the transverse

98

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE18
thermal stress. The principal stresses and the stress intensity include the shear force stress component.
Angles listed in the output are measured () as shown in Figure 2 (p. 99). A general description of solution
output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.

Figure 2 PIPE18 Stress Output

SBEND
J

ST

SH

Torsional
Moment

SAXL

SDIR

Shear
Force
The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:
A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
(ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R column
indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and - indicates that the item is not available.

Table 2 PIPE18 Element Output Definitions


Name

Definition

EL

Element Number

NODES

Nodes - I, J

MAT

Material number

VOLU:

Volume

XC, YC, ZC

Location where results are reported

CORAL

Corrosion thickness allowance

TEMP

TOUT(I), TIN(I), TOUT(J), TIN(J)

TEMP

TAVG(I), T90(I), T180(I), TAVG(J), T90(J), T180(J)

PRES

PINT, PX, PY, PZ, POUT

FFACT

Element flexibility factor

MFOR(X, Y, Z)

Member forces for nodes I and J (in the element


coordinate system)

MMOM(X, Y, Z)

Member moments for nodes I and J (in the element


coordinate system)

SFACTI, SFACTJ

Stress intensification factors at nodes I and J

STH

Stress due to maximum thermal gradient through


the wall thickness

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

99

PIPE18
Name

Definition

SPR2

Hoop pressure stress for code calculations

SMI, SMJ

Moment stress at nodes I and J for code calculations

SDIR

Direct (axial) stress

SBEND

Maximum bending stress at outer surface

ST

Shear stress at outer surface due to torsion

SSF

Shear stress due to shear force

S(1MX, 3MN,INTMX,
EQVMX)

Maximum principal stress, minimum principal stress,


maximum stress intensity, maximum equivalent
stress (over eight points on the outside surface at
both ends of the element)

S(1, 3, INT, EQV)

Maximum principal stress, minimum principal stress,


stress intensity, equivalent stress

S(AXL, RAD, H, XH)

Axial, radial, hoop, and shear stresses

EPEL(AXL, RAD, H,
XH)

Axial, radial, hoop, and shear strains

EPTH(AXL, RAD, H)

Axial, radial, and hoop thermal strain

1.

If the value is greater than 0.

2.

If KEYOPT(1) = 0

3.

If KEYOPT(1) = 1

4.

If KEYOPT(6) = 2

5.

The item repeats at 0, 45, 90, 135, 180, 225, 270, 315 at node I, then at node J (all at the outer
surface)

6.

Available only at centroid as a *GET item.

The following tables list output available through the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number
method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence
Number Table of this manual for more information. The following notation is used in Table 3: PIPE18 Item
and Sequence Numbers (Node I) (p. 101) through Table 5: PIPE18 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 103):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: PIPE18 Element Output Definitions (p. 99)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
E
sequence number for single-valued or constant element data

100

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE18
I,J
sequence number for data at nodes I and J

Table 3 PIPE18 Item and Sequence Numbers (Node I)


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Circumferential Location
Item

SAXL

LS

SRAD

45

90

135 180 225 270 315

13

17

21

25

29

LS

10

14

18

22

26

30

SH

LS

11

15

19

23

27

31

SXH

LS

12

16

20

24

28

32

EPELAXL

LEPEL

13

17

21

25

29

EPELRAD

LEPEL

10

14

18

22

26

30

EPELH

LEPEL

11

15

19

23

27

31

EPELXH

LEPEL

12

16

20

24

28

32

EPTHAXL

LEPTH

13

17

21

25

29

EPTHRAD

LEPTH

10

14

18

22

26

30

EPTHH

LEPTH

11

15

19

23

27

31

S1

NMISC

11

16

21

26

31

36

S3

NMISC

13

18

23

28

33

38

SINT

NMISC

14

19

24

29

34

39

SEQV

NMISC

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SBEND

NMISC

91

SSF

NMISC

92

MFORX

SMISC

MFORY

SMISC

MFORZ

SMISC

MMOMX

SMISC

MMOMY

SMISC

MMOMZ

SMISC

SDIR

SMISC

13

ST

SMISC

14

TOUT

LBFE

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

101

PIPE18
Output
Quantity
Name
TIN

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Circumferential Location
Item

LBFE

45

90

135 180 225 270 315


-

Table 4 PIPE18 Item and Sequence Numbers (Node J)


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Circumferential Location
Item

SAXL

LS

SRAD

45

90

33

37

41

45

49

53

57

61

LS

34

38

42

46

50

54

58

62

SH

LS

35

39

43

47

51

55

59

63

SXH

LS

36

40

44

48

52

56

60

64

EPELAXL

LEPEL

33

37

41

45

49

53

57

61

EPELRAD

LEPEL

34

38

42

46

50

54

58

62

EPELH

LEPEL

35

39

43

47

51

55

59

63

EPELXH

LEPEL

36

40

44

48

52

56

60

64

EPTHAXL

LEPTH

33

37

41

45

49

53

57

61

EPTHRAD

LEPTH

34

38

42

46

50

54

58

62

EPTHH

LEPTH

35

39

43

47

51

55

59

63

S1

NMISC

41

46

51

56

61

66

71

76

S3

NMISC

43

48

53

58

63

68

73

78

SINT

NMISC

44

49

54

59

64

69

74

79

SEQV

NMISC

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

SBEND

NMISC

93

SSF

NMISC

94

MFORX

SMISC

MFORY

SMISC

MFORZ

SMISC

MMOMX

SMISC

10

MMOMY

SMISC

11

MMOMZ

SMISC

12

SDIR

SMISC

15

ST

SMISC

16

TOUT

LBFE

12

10

11

102

135 180 225 270 315

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE18
Output
Quantity
Name
TIN

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Circumferential Location
Item

LBFE

45

90

16

135 180 225 270 315

13

14

15

Table 5 PIPE18 Item and Sequence Numbers


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and
ESOL Command
Input
Item

SFACTI

NMISC

81

SFACTJ

NMISC

82

SPR2

NMISC

83

SMI

NMISC

84

SMJ

NMISC

85

S1MX

NMISC

86

S3MN

NMISC

87

SINTMX

NMISC

88

SEQVMX

NMISC

89

FFACT

NMISC

90

STH

SMISC

17

PINT

SMISC

18

PX

SMISC

19

PY

SMISC

20

PZ

SMISC

21

POUT

SMISC

22

PIPE18 Assumptions and Restrictions

The curved pipe must not have a zero length or wall thickness. In addition, the OD must not be less
than or equal to zero and the ID must not be less than zero.

The corrosion allowance must be less than the wall thickness.

The element is limited to having an axis with a single curvature and a subtended angle of 0 < 90.

Shear deflection capability is also included in the element formulation.

The elbow is assumed to have "closed ends" so that the axial pressure effect is included.

When used in a large deflection analysis, the location of the third node (K) is used only to initially orient
the element.

The element temperatures are assumed to be linear along the length. The average wall temperature
at = 0 is computed as 2 * TAVG - T(180) and the average wall temperature at = -90 is computed
as 2 * TAVG - T(90).

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

103

PIPE18

Stress intensification factors input with values less than 1.0 are set to 1.0.

The element formulation is based upon thin-walled theory. The elbow should have a large radius-tothickness ratio since the integration points are assumed to be located at the midthickness of the wall.

Only the lumped mass matrix is available.

PIPE18 Product Restrictions


When used in the product(s) listed below, the stated product-specific restrictions apply to this element in
addition to the general assumptions and restrictions given in the previous section.
ANSYS Professional

The DAMP material property is not allowed.

The only special feature allowed is large deflection.

104

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PLANE42
2-D Structural Solid
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Product Restrictions

PLANE42 Element Description


Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a current-technology element such as PLANE182 (KEYOPT(1) = 3).
PLANE42 is used for 2-D modeling of solid structures. The element can be used either as a plane element
(plane stress or plane strain) or as an axisymmetric element. The element is defined by four nodes having
two degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x and y directions. The element has plasticity,
creep, swelling, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain capabilities.
An option is available to suppress the extra displacement shapes. See PLANE183 for a multi-node version
of this element. See SOLID272 for an axisymmetric version that accepts nonaxisymmetric loading.

Figure 1 PLANE42 Geometry


3
K

K, L
4
Element coordinate

KEYOPT(1) = 1)

Y
(or axial)

system (shown for

I
J

x
1

X (or radial)

(Triangular Option not recommended)

PLANE42 Input Data


The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 105). The
element input data includes four nodes, a thickness (for the plane stress option only) and the orthotropic
material properties. Orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The
element coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures may be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 105). Positive pressures act into the element.
Temperatures and fluences may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I)
defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). For any other input pattern,
unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. Similar defaults occurs for fluence except that zero is used instead
of TUNIF.
The nodal forces, if any, should be input per unit of depth for a plane analysis (except for KEYOPT(3) = 3)
and on a full 360 basis for an axisymmetric analysis. KEYOPT(2) is used to include or suppress the extra
displacement shapes.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

105

PLANE42
KEYOPT(5) and KEYOPT(6) provide various element printout options. (See Element Solution.)
You cannot set initial state conditions (INISTATE) using this element. You can set initial state conditions
using current-technology elements (such as LINK180,SHELL181). To continue using initial state conditions
in future versions of ANSYS, consider using a current element technology. For more information, see Legacy
vs. Current Element Technologies in the Element Reference. For more information about setting initial state
values, see the INISTATE command documentation and Initial State Loading in the Basic Analysis Guide.
You can include the effects of pressure load stiffness in a geometric nonlinear analysis using SOLCONTROL,,,INCP. Pressure load stiffness effects are included in linear eigenvalue buckling automatically. If an unsymmetric
matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, use NROPT,UNSYM.
A summary of the element input is given in "PLANE42 Input Summary" (p. 106). A general description of element
input is given in Element Input. For axisymmetric applications see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements.

PLANE42 Input Summary


Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
None, if KEYOPT(3) = 0, 1, or 2
THK - Thickness if KEYOPT(3) = 3
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ), DENS, GXY, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures -face 1 (J-I), face 2 (K-J), face 3 (L-K), face 4 (I-L)
Body Loads
Temperatures -T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Fluences -FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L)
Special Features
Plasticity (BISO, MISO, BKIN, MKIN, KINH, DP, ANISO)
Creep (CREEP, RATE)
Swelling (SWELL)
Elasticity (MELAS)
Other material (USER)
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Birth and death
Adaptive descent

106

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PLANE42
Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command.
KEYOPT(1)
Element coordinate system defined:
0 -Element coordinate system is parallel to the global coordinate system
1 -Element coordinate system is based on the element I-J side
KEYOPT(2)
Extra displacement shapes:
0 -Include extra displacement shapes
1 -Suppress extra displacement shapes
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 -Plane stress
1 -Axisymmetric
2 -Plane strain (Z strain = 0.0)
3 -Plane stress with thickness input
KEYOPT(5)
Extra stress output:
0 -Basic element solution
1 -Repeat basic solution for all integration points
2 -Nodal stress solution
KEYOPT(6)
Extra surface output:
0 -Basic element solution
1 -Surface solution for face I-J also.
2 -Surface solution for both faces I-J and K-L also. (Surface solution available for linear materials only)
3 -Nonlinear solution at each integration point also.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

107

PLANE42
4 -Surface solution for faces with nonzero pressure

PLANE42 Output Data


The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution

Additional element output as shown in Table 1: PLANE42 Element Output Definitions (p. 108)

Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 108).


The element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. Surface stresses are available
on any face. Surface stresses on face IJ, for example, are defined parallel and perpendicular to the IJ line
and along the Z axis for a plane analysis or in the hoop direction for an axisymmetric analysis. A general
description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view
results.

Figure 2 PLANE42 Stress Output


3

SY
4
SX

Y
(or axial)
I
X (or radial)

Stress directions shown are for KEYOPT(1) = 0


The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:
A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
(ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R column
indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and - indicates that the item is not available.

Table 1 PLANE42 Element Output Definitions


Name

Definition

EL

Element Number

NODES

Nodes - I, J, K, L

MAT

Material number

THICK

Average thickness

VOLU:

Volume

108

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PLANE42
Name

Definition

XC, YC

Location where results are reported

PRES

Pressures P1 at nodes J,I; P2 at K,J; P3 at L,K; P4


at I,L

TEMP

Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)

FLUEN

Fluences FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L)

S:X, Y, Z, XY

Stresses (SZ = 0.0 for plane stress elements)

S:1, 2, 3

Principal stresses

S:INT

Stress intensity

S:EQV

Equivalent stress

EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY

Elastic strains

EPEL:1, 2, 3

Principal elastic strain

EPEL:EQV

Equivalent elastic strain [4]

EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY

Average thermal strain

EPTH:EQV

Equivalent thermal strain [4]

EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY

Plastic strain

EPPL:EQV

Equivalent plastic strain [4]

EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY

Creep strains

EPCR:EQV

Equivalent creep strains [4]

EPSW:

Swelling strain

NL:EPEQ

Equivalent plastic strain

NL:SRAT

Ratio of trial stress to stress on yield surface

NL:SEPL

Equivalent stress on stress-strain curve

NL:HPRES

Hydrostatic pressure

FACE

Face label

EPEL(PAR, PER,
Z)

Surface elastic strains (parallel, perpendicular,


Z or hoop)

TEMP

Surface average temperature

S(PAR, PER, Z)

Surface stresses (parallel, perpendicular, Z or


hoop)

SINT

Surface stress intensity

SEQV

Surface equivalent stress

LOCI:X, Y, Z

Integration point locations

1.

Nonlinear solution, output only if the element has a nonlinear material.

2.

Surface output (if KEYOPT(6) is 1,2, or 4)

3.

Available only at centroid as a *GET item.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

109

PLANE42
4.

The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio: for elastic and thermal this value is set by the
user (MP,PRXY); for plastic and creep this value is set at 0.5.

Table 2 PLANE42 Miscellaneous Element Output


Description

Names of Items Output

Integration Point Solution


(KEYOPT(5) = 1)

TEMP, SINT, SEQV, EPEL(1, 2,


3), S(X, Y, Z, XY), S(1, 2, 3)

Nodal Stress Solution (KEYOPT(5) = 2)

TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY), S(1, 2,


3), SINT, SEQV

Nonlinear Integration Point


Solution (KEYOPT(6) = 3)

EPPL, EPEQ, SRAT, SEPL,


HPRES, EPCR, EPSW

1.

Valid if the element has a nonlinear material and KEYOPT(6) = 3

Note
For axisymmetric solutions with KEYOPT(1) = 0, the X, Y, Z, and XY stress and strain outputs correspond to the radial, axial, hoop, and in-plane shear stresses and strains, respectively.
Table 3: PLANE42 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 110) lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and
The Item and Sequence Number Table of this manual for more information. The following notation is used
in Table 3: PLANE42 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 110):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: PLANE42 Element Output Definitions (p. 108)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
E
sequence number for single-valued or constant element data
I,J,K,L
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,K,L

Table 3 PLANE42 Item and Sequence Numbers


Output
Quantity
Name

Item

P1

SMISC

P2

SMISC

P3

SMISC

P4

SMISC

S:1

NMISC

11

16

S:2

NMISC

12

17

S:3

NMISC

13

18

110

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PLANE42
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

S:INT

NMISC

14

19

S:EQV

NMISC

10

15

20

FLUEN

NMISC

21

22

23

24

THICK

NMISC

25

See Surface Solution of this manual for the item and sequence numbers for surface output for the ETABLE
command.

PLANE42 Assumptions and Restrictions

The area of the element must be nonzero.

The element must lie in a global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 105) and the Y-axis must be the axis
of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses. An axisymmetric structure should be modeled in the +X quadrants.

A triangular element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L node numbers (see Triangle, Prism,
and Tetrahedral Elements).

The extra shapes are automatically deleted for triangular elements so that a constant strain element
results.

Surface stress printout is valid only if the conditions described in Element Solution are met.

PLANE42 Product Restrictions


When used in the product(s) listed below, the stated product-specific restrictions apply to this element in
addition to the general assumptions and restrictions given in the previous section.
ANSYS Professional

The DAMP material property is not allowed.

Fluence body loads are not applicable.

The only special feature allowed is stress stiffening.

KEYOPT(6) = 3 is not applicable.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

111

112

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SOLID45
3-D Structural Solid
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Product Restrictions

SOLID45 Element Description


Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a current-technology element such as SOLID185 (KEYOPT(2) = 3).
SOLID45 is used for the 3-D modeling of solid structures. The element is defined by eight nodes having
three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions.
The element has plasticity, creep, swelling, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. A
reduced integration option with hourglass control is available. A higher-order version of the SOLID45 element
is SOLID186.

Figure 1 SOLID45 Geometry


4

O,P

K,L

I
6

Element coordinate

J
Prism Option

M
N

system (shown for

KEYOPT(4) = 1)

y
L

y
3

M,N,O,P
I
K,L

z
y
x
I

1
J

Tetrahedral Option not recommended

Surface Coordinate System


Y
X

SOLID45 Input Data


The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 113). The
element is defined by eight nodes and the orthotropic material properties. Orthotropic material directions
correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element coordinate system orientation is as described
in Coordinate Systems.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures may be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 113). Positive pressures act into the element.
Temperatures and fluences may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I)
defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). For any other input temper-

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

113

SOLID45
ature pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. Similar defaults occurs for fluence except that zero
is used instead of TUNIF.
KEYOPT(1) is used to include or suppress the extra displacement shapes. KEYOPT(5) and KEYOPT(6) provide
various element printout options (see Element Solution).
This element also supports uniform reduced (1 point) integration with hourglass control when KEYOPT(2) =
1. Using uniform reduced integration provides the following advantages when running a nonlinear analysis:

Less cpu time is required for element stiffness formation and stress/strain calculations to achieve a
comparable accuracy to the FULL integration option.

The length of the element history saved record (.ESAV and .OSAV) is about 1/7th as much as when the
full integration (2 X 2 X 2) is used for the same number of elements.

Nonlinear convergence characteristic of the option is generally far superior to the default full integration
with extra displacement shape; that is, KEYOPT(1) = 0, KEYOPT(2) = 0.

The analysis will not suffer from volumetric locking which can be caused by plasticity or other incompressible material properties.

An analysis using uniform reduced integration can have the following disadvantages:

The analysis is not as accurate as the full integration method, which is apparent in the linear analysis
for the same mesh.

The analysis cannot capture the bending behavior with a single layer of elements; for example, in the
case of a fixed-end cantilever with a lateral point load, modeled by one layer of elements laterally. Instead,
four elements are usually recommended.

When the uniform reduced integration option is used (KEYOPT(2) = 1 - this option is the same as SOLID185
with KEYOPT(2) = 1), you can check the accuracy of the solution by comparing the total energy (SENE label
in ETABLE) and the artificial energy (AENE label in ETABLE) introduced by hourglass control. If the ratio of
artificial energy to total energy is less than 5%, the solution is generally acceptable. If the ratio exceeds 5%,
refine the mesh. The total energy and artificial energy can also be monitored by using the OUTPR,VENG
command in the solution phase. For more details, see Energies in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical
APDL and Mechanical Applications.
You cannot set initial state conditions (INISTATE) using this element. You can set initial state conditions
using current-technology elements (such as LINK180,SHELL181). To continue using initial state conditions
in future versions of ANSYS, consider using a current element technology. For more information, see Legacy
vs. Current Element Technologies in the Element Reference. For more information about setting initial state
values, see the INISTATE command documentation and Initial State Loading in the Basic Analysis Guide.
You can include the effects of pressure load stiffness in a geometric nonlinear analysis using SOLCONTROL,,,INCP. Pressure load stiffness effects are included in linear eigenvalue buckling automatically. If an unsymmetric
matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, use NROPT,UNSYM.
A summary of the element input is given in "SOLID45 Input Summary" (p. 114). A general description of element
input is given in Element Input.

SOLID45 Input Summary


Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P

114

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SOLID45
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
HGSTF - Hourglass control factor needed only when KEYOPT(2) = 1.

Note
The valid value for this real constant is any positive number; default = 1.0. We recommend
that you use a value between 1 and 10.
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ), GXY, GYZ, GXZ, ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY,
CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ), DENS, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures -face 1 (J-I-L-K), face 2 (I-J-N-M), face 3 (J-K-O-N), face 4 (K-L-P-O), face 5 (L-I-M-P), face 6 (M-N-O-P)
Body Loads
Temperatures -T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P)
Fluences -FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N), FL(O), FL(P)
Special Features
Plasticity (BISO, MISO, BKIN, MKIN, KINH, DP, ANISO)
Creep (CREEP, RATE)
Swelling (SWELL)
Elasticity (MELAS)
Other material (USER)
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Birth and death
Adaptive descent
Initial stress import
Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command.
KEYOPT(1)
Include or suppress extra displacement shapes:
0 -Include extra displacement shapes
1 -Suppress extra displacement shapes
KEYOPT(2)
Integration option:

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

115

SOLID45
0 -Full integration with or without extra displacement shapes, depending on the setting of KEYOPT(1)
1 -Uniform reduced integration with hourglass control; suppress extra displacement shapes (KEYOPT(1)
is automatically set to 1).
KEYOPT(4)
Element coordinate system:
0 -Element coordinate system is parallel to the global coordinate system
1 -Element coordinate system is based on the element I-J side
KEYOPT(5)
Extra element output:
0 -Basic element solution
1 -Repeat basic solution for all integration points
2 -Nodal Stress Solution
KEYOPT(6)
Extra surface output:
0 -Basic element solution
1 -Surface solution for face I-J-N-M also
2 -Surface solution for face I-J-N-M and face K-L-P-O (Surface solution available for linear materials only)
3 -Include nonlinear solution at each integration point
4 -Surface solution for faces with nonzero pressure
KEYOPT(9)
Initial stress subroutine option (available only through direct input of the KEYOPT command):
0 -No user subroutine to provide initial stress (default)
1 -Read initial stress data from user subroutine INISTATE (see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable
Features for user written subroutines)

SOLID45 Output Data


The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:

116

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SOLID45

Additional element output as shown in Table 1: SOLID45 Element Output Definitions (p. 117)

Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 117). The element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. The surface stress outputs are in the surface coordinate systems and are available for any
face (KEYOPT(6)). The coordinate systems for faces IJNM and KLPO are shown in Figure 1 (p. 113). The other
surface coordinate systems follow similar orientations as indicated by the pressure face node description.
Surface stress printout is valid only if the conditions described in Element Solution are met. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.

Figure 2 SOLID45 Stress Output


P
O
SZ

SY
SX
L
K

I
J

Stress directions shown are for KEYOPT(4) = 0


When KEYOPT(2) = 1 (the element is using uniform reduced integration), all the outputs for the element
integration points are output in the same style as the full integration outputs. The number of points for full
integration is used for consistency of output within the same element type.
The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:
A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
(ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R column
indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and - indicates that the item is not available.

Table 1 SOLID45 Element Output Definitions


Name

Definition

EL

Element Number

NODES

Nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P

MAT

Material number

VOLU:

Volume

XC, YC, ZC

Location where results are reported

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

117

SOLID45
Name

Definition

PRES

Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, L, K; P2 at I, J, N, M; P3 at
J, K, O, N; P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P; P6 at M, N,
O, P

TEMP

Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P)

FLUEN

Fluences FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N), FL(O),


FL(P)

S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ

Stresses

S:1, 2, 3

Principal stresses

S:INT

Stress intensity

S:EQV

Equivalent stress

EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,


XZ

Elastic strains

EPEL:1, 2, 3

Principal elastic strains

EPEL:EQV

Equivalent elastic strain [4]

EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,


XZ

Average thermal strains

EPTH:EQV

Equivalent thermal strain [4]

EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,


XZ

Average plastic strains

EPPL:EQV

Equivalent plastic strain [4]

EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,


XZ

Average creep strains

EPCR:EQV

Equivalent creep strain [4]

EPSW:

Average swelling strain

NL:EPEQ

Average equivalent plastic strain

NL:SRAT

Ratio of trial stress to stress on yield surface

NL:SEPL

Average equivalent stress from stress-strain curve

NL:HPRES

Hydrostatic pressure

FACE

Face label

AREA

Face area

TEMP

Surface average temperature

EPEL

Surface elastic strains (X ,Y, XY)

PRESS

Surface pressure

S(X, Y, XY)

Surface stresses (X-axis parallel to line defined by


first two nodes which define the face)

S(1, 2, 3)

Surface principal stresses

SINT

Surface stress intensity

SEQV

Surface equivalent stress

LOCI:X, Y, Z

Integration point locations

118

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SOLID45
1.

Nonlinear solution, output only if the element has a nonlinear material

2.

Surface output (if KEYOPT(6) is 1, 2, or 4)

3.

Available only at centroid as a *GET item

4.

The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio: for elastic and thermal this value is set by the
user (MP,PRXY); for plastic and creep this value is set at 0.5.

5.

Output only if element has a thermal load.

Table 2 SOLID45 Miscellaneous Element Output


Description

Names of Items Output

Nonlinear Integration Pt.


Solution

EPPL, EPEQ, SRAT, SEPL,


HPRES, EPCR, EPSW

Integration Point Stress


Solution

TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ),


SINT, SEQV, EPEL

Nodal Stress Solution

TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ),


SINT, SEQV, EPEL

1.

Output at each of eight integration points, if the element has a nonlinear material and KEYOPT(6) = 3

2.

Output at each integration point, if KEYOPT(5) = 1

3.

Output at each node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2

Table 3: SOLID45 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 119) lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and
The Item and Sequence Number Table of this manual for more information. The following notation is used
in Table 3: SOLID45 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 119):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: SOLID45 Element Output Definitions (p. 117)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
I,J,...,P
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,...,P

Table 3 SOLID45 Item and Sequence Numbers


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

P1

SMISC

P2

SMISC

P3

SMISC

10

12

11

P4

SMISC

13

14

16

15

P5

SMISC

18

17

19

20

P6

SMISC

21

22

23

24

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

119

SOLID45
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

S:1

NMISC

11

16

21

26

31

36

S:2

NMISC

12

17

22

27

32

37

S:3

NMISC

13

18

23

28

33

38

S:INT

NMISC

14

19

24

29

34

39

S:EQV

NMISC

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

FLUEN

NMISC

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

See Surface Solution in this manual for the item and sequence numbers for surface output for the ETABLE
command.

SOLID45 Assumptions and Restrictions

Zero volume elements are not allowed.

Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 113) or may have the planes IJKL and MNOP
interchanged.

The element may not be twisted such that the element has two separate volumes. This occurs most
frequently when the elements are not numbered properly.

All elements must have eight nodes.

A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L and duplicate O and P node
numbers (see Triangle, Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements).

A tetrahedron shape is also available. The extra shapes are automatically deleted for tetrahedron
elements.

SOLID45 Product Restrictions


When used in the product(s) listed below, the stated product-specific restrictions apply to this element in
addition to the general assumptions and restrictions given in the previous section.
ANSYS Professional

The DAMP material property is not allowed.

Fluence body loads are not applicable.

The only special feature allowed is stress stiffening.

KEYOPT(6) = 3 is not applicable.

120

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

CONTAC52
3-D Point-to-Point Contact
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Product Restrictions

CONTAC52 Element Description


Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a current-technology element such as CONTA178.
CONTAC52 represents two surfaces which may maintain or break physical contact and may slide relative to
each other. The element is capable of supporting only compression in the direction normal to the surfaces
and shear (Coulomb friction) in the tangential direction. The element has three degrees of freedom at each
node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions.
The element may be initially preloaded in the normal direction or it may be given a gap specification. A
specified stiffness acts in the normal and tangential directions when the gap is closed and not sliding.

Figure 1 CONTAC52 Geometry

x z

Gap
Z
X

Y
z
x

y
x

CONTAC52 Input Data


The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 121). The
element is defined by two nodes, two stiffnesses (KN and KS), an initial gap or interference (GAP), and an
initial element status (START). The orientation of the interface is defined by the node locations, or by a userspecified gap direction. The interface is assumed to be perpendicular to the I-J line or to the specified gap
direction. The element coordinate system has its origin at node I and the x-axis is directed toward node J
or in the user-specified gap direction. The interface is parallel to the element y-z plane.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

121

CONTAC52
The normal stiffness, KN, should be based upon the stiffness of the surfaces in contact. See Nonlinear
Structural Analysis in the Structural Analysis Guide for guidelines on choosing a value for KN. In some cases
(such as initial interference analyses, nonconvergence, or over penetration), it may be useful to change the
KN value between load steps or in a restart in order to obtain an accurate, converged solution. The sticking
stiffness, KS, represents the stiffness in the tangential direction when elastic Coulomb friction is selected (
> 0.0 and KEYOPT(1) = 0). The coefficient of friction is input as material property MU and is evaluated at
the average of the two node temperatures. Stiffnesses may also be computed from the maximum expected
force divided by the maximum allowable surface displacement. KS defaults to KN.
The initial gap defines the gap size (if positive) or the displacement interference (if negative). This input is
the opposite of that used for CONTAC12 (described in the Feature Archive). If you do not specify the gap
direction (by means of real constants NX, NY, and NZ), an interference causes the nodes to separate. The
gap size may be input as a real constant (GAP) or automatically calculated from the input node locations
(as the distance between node I and node J) if KEYOPT(4) = 1. Interference must be input as a real constant.
Stiffness is associated with a zero or negative gap. The initial element status (START) is used to define the
"previous" condition of the interface to be used at the start of the first substep. This input is used to override
the condition implied by the interference specification and is useful in anticipating the final interface configuration and in reducing the number of iterations required for convergence.
You can specify the gap direction by means of real constants NX, NY, and NZ (the global Cartesian X, Y, and
Z components of the gap direction vector). If you do not specify the gap direction, the program will calculate
the direction based on the initial positions of the I and J nodes, such that a positive normal displacement
(in the element coordinate system) of node J relative to node I tends to open the gap. You should always
specify the gap direction if nodes I and J have the same initial coordinates, if the model has an initial interference condition in which the underlying elements' geometry overlaps, or if the initial open gap distance
is very small. If the gap is initially geometrically open, the correct normal (NX, NY, NZ) usually points from
node I toward node J.
The only material property used is the interface coefficient of friction . A zero value should be used for
frictionless surfaces. Temperatures may be specified at the element nodes (for material property evaluation
only). The node I temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. The node J temperature defaults to T(I).
The force deflection relationships for the interface element can be separated into the normal and tangential
(sliding) directions as shown in Figure 2 (p. 125). The element condition at the beginning of the first substep
is determined from the START parameter. If the interface is closed and sticking, KN is used in the gap resistance
and KS is used for sticking resistance. If the interface is closed but sliding, KN is used in the gap resistance
and the constant friction force FN is used for the sliding resistance.
In the normal direction, when the normal force (FN) is negative, the interface remains in contact and responds
as a linear spring. As the normal force becomes positive, contact is broken and no force is transmitted.
KEYOPT(3) can be used to specify a "weak spring" across an open interface, which is useful for preventing
rigid body motion that could occur in a static analysis. The weak spring stiffness is computed by multiplying
the normal stiffness KN by a reduction factor. The default reduction factor of 1E-6 can be overridden with
real constant REDFACT.
This "weak spring" capability is not analogous to overlaying an actual spring element (such as COMBIN14)
with a low stiffness value. The REDFACT capability will not limit gap separation when a tensile force is applied.
In the tangential direction, for FN < 0 and the absolute value of the tangential force (FS) less than |FN|, the
interface sticks and responds as a linear spring. For FN < 0 and FS = |FN|, sliding occurs. If contact is broken,
FS = 0.

122

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

CONTAC52
If KEYOPT(1) = 1, rigid Coulomb friction is selected, KS is not used, and the elastic sticking capability is removed. This option is useful for displacement controlled problems or for certain dynamic problems where
sliding dominates.
For analyses involving friction, using NROPT,UNSYM is useful (and, in fact, sometimes required) for problems
where the normal and tangential (sliding) motions are strongly coupled, such as in a wedge insertion
problem.
A summary of the element input is given in "CONTAC52 Input Summary" (p. 123). A general description of
element input is given in Element Input.

CONTAC52 Input Summary


Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
KN, GAP, START, KS, REDFACT, NX,
NY, NZ
See Table 1: CONTAC52 Real Constants (p. 124) for details on these real constants.
Material Properties
MU
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures -T(I), T(J)
Special Features
Nonlinear
Adaptive descent
KEYOPT(1)
Sticking stiffness if MU > 0.0:
0 -Elastic Coulomb friction (KS used for sticking stiffness)
1 -Rigid Coulomb friction (resisting force only)
KEYOPT(3)
Weak spring across open gap:
0 -No weak spring across an open gap
1 -Use a weak spring across an open gap

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

123

CONTAC52
KEYOPT(4)
Basis for gap size:
0 -Gap size based on gap real constant
1 -Gap size determined from initial node locations (ignore gap real constant)
KEYOPT(7)
Element-level time incrementation control. Note that this option should be activated first at the procedure
level if SOLCONTROL is ON. SOLCONTROL,ON,ON is the most frequent usage with this element. If
SOLCONTROL,ON,OFF, this keyoption is not activated.
0 -Change in contact predictions made to achieve the minimum time/load increment whenever a
change in contact status occurs
1 -Change in contact predictions made to maintain a reasonable time/load increment (recommended)

Table 1 CONTAC52 Real Constants


No.

Name

Description

KN

Normal stiffness

GAP

Initial gap size; a negative value assumes an initial interference


condition.
Initial condition:
If = 0.0 or blank, initial status of element is determined from
gap input
If = 1.0, gap is initially closed and not sliding (if MU 0.0), or
sliding (if MU = 0.0)
If = 2.0, gap is initially closed and sliding
If = 3.0, gap initially open

START

KS

Sticking stiffness

REDFACT

Default reduction factor 1E-6

NX

Defined gap normal - X component

NY

Defined gap normal - Y component

NZ

Defined gap normal - Z component

CONTAC52 Output Data


The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution

Additional element output as shown in Table 2: CONTAC52 Element Output Definitions (p. 125).

Force-deflection curves are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 125).


The value of USEP is determined from the normal displacement (un) (in the element x-direction) between
the interface nodes at the end of a substep, that is: USEP = (un)J - (un)I + GAP. This value is used in determ-

124

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

CONTAC52
ining the normal force, FN. The values represented by UT(Y, Z) are the total translational displacements in
the element y and z directions. The maximum value printed for the sliding force, FS, is |FN|. Sliding may
occur in both the element y and z directions. STAT describes the status of the element at the end of a substep.
If STAT = 1, the gap is closed and no sliding occurs. If STAT = 3, the gap is open. A value of STAT = 2 indicates
the node J slides relative to node I. For a frictionless surface ( = 0.0), the converged element status is either
STAT = 2 or 3.
The element coordinate system orientation angles and (shown in Figure 1 (p. 121)) are computed by the
program from the node locations. These values are printed as ALPHA and BETA respectively. ranges from
0 to 360 and from -90 to +90. Elements lying along the Z-axis are assigned values of = 0, = 90,
respectively. Elements lying off the Z-axis have their coordinate system oriented as shown for the general
, position. Note, for = 90, 90, the element coordinate system flips 90 about the Z-axis. The value
of ANGLE represents the principal angle of the friction force in the element y-z plane. A general description
of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.

Figure 2 CONTAC52 Force-Deflection Relationship


FN

FS

FN

(un)J - (un)I + GAP

(us)J - (us)I

KN

KS
1

FN
For FN < 0, and no
reversed loading

(a)

(b)

The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:


A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
(ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R column
indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and - indicates that the item is not available.

Table 2 CONTAC52 Element Output Definitions


Name

Definition

EL

Element Number

NODES

Nodes - I, J

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

125

CONTAC52
Name

Definition

XC, YC, ZC

Location where results are reported

TEMP

T(I), T(J)

USEP

Gap size

FN

Normal force (along I-J line)

STAT

Element status

ALPHA, BETA

Element orientation angles

MU

Coefficient of friction

UT(Y, Z)

Displacement (node J - node I) in element y and z directions

FS

Tangential (friction) force (vector sum)

ANGLE

Principal angle of friction force in element y-z plane

1.

If the value of STAT is:


1 - Contact, no sliding
2 - Sliding contact
3 - Gap open

2.

If MU > 0.0

3.

Available only at centroid as a *GET item.

Table 3: CONTAC52 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 126) lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and
The Item and Sequence Number Table of this manual for more information. The following notation is used
in Table 3: CONTAC52 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 126):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: CONTAC52 Element Output Definitions (p. 125)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
E
sequence number for single-valued or constant element data

Table 3 CONTAC52 Item and Sequence Numbers


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and
ESOL Command
Input
Item

FN

SMISC

FS

SMISC

STAT

NMISC

OLDST

NMISC

126

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

CONTAC52
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and
ESOL Command
Input
Item

USEP

NMISC

ALPHA

NMISC

BETA

NMISC

UTY

NMISC

UTZ

NMISC

MU

NMISC

ANGLE

NMISC

CONTAC52 Assumptions and Restrictions

The element operates bilinearly only in the static and the nonlinear transient dynamic analyses. If used
in other analysis types, the element maintains its initial status throughout the analysis.

The element is nonlinear and requires an iterative solution. Nonconverged substeps are not in equilibrium.

Unless the gap direction is specified (NX, NY, NZ), nodes I and J may not be coincident since the nodal
locations define the interface orientation. The element maintains is original orientation in either a small
or a large deflection analysis.

The element coordinate system is defined by the initial I and J node locations or by the specified gap
direction.

The gap value may be specified independent of the node locations.

The element may have rotated nodal coordinates since a displacement transformation into the element
coordinate system is included.

The element stiffness KN should not be exactly zero, and unreasonably high stiffness values also should
be avoided. The rate of convergence decreases as the stiffness increases.

Although it is permissible to change KN, it is not permissible to change any other real constants between
load steps. Therefore, if you plan to change KN, you cannot allow the value of KS to be defined by default,
because the program would then attempt to redefine KS as KN changed. You must explicitly define KS
whenever KN changes, to maintain a consistent value throughout all load steps.

The element may not be deactivated with the EKILL command.

If is not equal to zero, the element is nonconservative as well as nonlinear. Nonconservative elements
require that the load be applied very gradually, along the actual load history path, and in the proper
sequence (if multiple loadings exist).

CONTAC52 Product Restrictions


When used in the product(s) listed below, the stated product-specific restrictions apply to this element in
addition to the general assumptions and restrictions given in the previous section.
ANSYS Professional

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

127

CONTAC52

This element is frictionless. MU is not allowed as a material property and KS is not allowed as a real
constant.

Temperature body loads are not applicable in a structural analysis.

KEYOPT(1) is not applicable.

128

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE59
Immersed Pipe or Cable
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Product Restrictions

PIPE59 Element Description


Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a current-technology element such as PIPE288.To apply ocean loading using PIPE288, issue SOCEAN and ocean commands
(OCxxxxxx) .
PIPE59 is a uniaxial element with tension-compression, torsion, and bending capabilities, and with member
forces simulating ocean waves and current. The element has six degrees of freedom at each node: translations
in the nodal x, y, and z directions and rotations about the nodal x, y, and z-axes. The element loads include
the hydrodynamic and buoyant effects of the water and the element mass includes the added mass of the
water and the pipe internals. A cable representation option is also available with the element. The element
has stress stiffening and large deflection capabilities.

Figure 1 PIPE59 Geometry


Z

T90

x
2
z

Pout

Tavg

PX

y
3

T180

PY

Pint

J
x

PZ

z
x

Tout

y
z

Tin

x, y, z defines the element


coordinate system orientation

PIPE59 Input Data


The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 129). The
element input data (see "PIPE59 Input Summary" (p. 130)) includes two nodes, the pipe outer diameter and
wall thickness, certain loading and inertial information (described in Table 1: PIPE59 Real Constants (p. 132)
and Figure 2 (p. 130)), and the isotropic material properties. An external "insulation" may be defined to represent ice loads or biofouling. The material VISC is used only to determine Reynolds number of the fluid
outside the pipe.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

129

PIPE59
The element x-axis is oriented from node I toward node J. The element y-axis is automatically calculated to
be parallel to the global X-Y plane. Several orientations are shown in Figure 1 (p. 129). For the case where
the element is parallel to the global Z-axis (or within a 0.01 percent slope of it), the element y-axis is oriented
parallel to the global Y-axis (as shown). Input and output locations around the pipe circumference identified
as being at 0 are located along the element y-axis, and similarly 90 is along the element z-axis.

Figure 2 PIPE59 Geometry


Z

Direction of
wave
Z

Water surface

WL(i)

FSO
R

(i)

A(i)

Global Cartesian
coordinate system

Structure

(origin must be
at water surface)
Direction of

-Z(j)

DEPTH

drift current
Y

d(j)

Mud Line

KEYOPT(1) may be used to convert the element to the cable option by deleting the bending stiffnesses. If
the element is not "torque balanced", the twist-tension option may be used (KEYOPT(1) = 2). This option
accounts for the twisting induced when a helically wound or armored structure is stretched. The KEYOPT(2)
key allows a reduced mass matrix and load vector formulation (with rotational degrees of freedom terms
deleted as described in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications). This formulation is useful for suppressing large deflections and improving bending stresses in long, slender members.
It is also often used with the twist-tension pipe option for cable structures.
The description of the waves, the current, and the water density are input through the water motion table.
The water motion table is associated with a material number and is explained in detail in Table 2: PIPE59
Water Motion Table (p. 134). If the water motion table is not input, no water is assumed to surround the pipe.
Note that even though the word "water" is used to describe various input quantities, the quantities may
actually be characteristic of any fluid. Alternate drag coefficient and temperature data may also be input
through this table.
A summary of the element input is given in "PIPE59 Input Summary" (p. 130). A general description of element
input is given in Element Input.

PIPE59 Input Summary


Nodes
I, J

130

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE59
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ if KEYOPT(1) 1, or
UX, UY, UZ if KEYOPT(1) = 1
Real Constants
DO, TWALL, CD, CM, DENSO, FSO,
CENMPL, CI, CB, CT, ISTR, DENSIN,
TKIN, TWISTTEN
See Table 1: PIPE59 Real Constants (p. 132) for details.
Material Properties
EX, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), PRXY (or NUXY), DENS, GXY, DAMP, VISC
Surface Loads
Pressures -1-PINT, 2-PX, 3-PY, 4-PZ, 5-POUT
Body Loads
Temperatures -TOUT(I), TIN(I), TOUT(J), TIN(J) if KEYOPT(3) = 0
TAVG(I), T90(I), T180(I), TAVG(J), T90(J), T180(J) if KEYOPT(3) = 1
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
0 -Pipe option
1 -Cable option
2 -Pipe with twist-tension option
KEYOPT(2)
Load vector and mass matrix:
0 -Consistent mass matrix and load vector
1 -Reduced mass matrix and load vector
KEYOPT(3)
Temperatures represent:
0 -The through-wall gradient
1 -The diametral gradient

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

131

PIPE59
KEYOPT(5)
Wave force modifications:
0 -Waves act on elements at their actual location
1 -Elements are assumed to be at wave peak
2 -Upward vertical wave velocity acts on element
3 -Downward vertical wave velocity acts on element
4 -Elements are assumed to be at wave trough
KEYOPT(6)
Member force and moment output:
0 -No printout of member forces or moments
2 -Print member forces and moments in the element coordinate system
KEYOPT(7)
Extra element output:
0 -Basic element printout
1 -Additional hydrodynamic integration point printout
KEYOPT(8)
End cap loads:
0 -Internal and external pressures cause loads on end caps
1 -Internal and external pressures do not cause loads on end caps
KEYOPT(9)
PX, PY, and PZ transverse pressures:
0 -Use only the normal component of pressure
1 -Use the full pressure (normal and shear components)

Table 1 PIPE59 Real Constants


No.

Name

Description

DO

Outside diameter (Do)

TWALL

Wall thickness of the pipe (defaults to Do/2.0)

132

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE59
No.

Name

Description

CD

Normal drag coefficient (CD). May be overridden by Constants 43


through 54 of water motion table (see Table 2: PIPE59 Water Motion
Table)

CM

Coefficient of inertia (CM)

DENSO

Internal fluid density (used for pressure effect only) (Mass/Length3)

FSO

Z coordinate location of the free surface of the fluid on the inside


of the pipe (used for pressure effect only)

CENMPL

Mass per unit length of the internal fluid and additional hardware
(used for mass matrix computation)

CI

Added-mass-used/added-mass for circular cross section (if blank


or 0, defaults to 1; if CI should be 0.0, enter negative number)

CB

Buoyancy force ratio (Buoyancy-force based on outside diameter


and water density) (if blank or 0, defaults to 1; if CB should be 0.0,
enter negative number)

10

CT

Coefficient of tangential drag (CT). May be overridden by Constants


55 through 66 of water motion table (See Table 2: PIPE59 Water
Motion Table).

11

ISTR

Initial strain in axial direction.

12

DENSIN

Density of external insulation[1].

13

TKIN

Thickness of external insulation (ti).

14

TWISTTEN

Twist tension constant (used if KEYOPT(1) = 2) (See Theory Reference


for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details).

1.

Density of external insulation (i).

PIPE59 Water Motion Information


The data listed in Table 2: PIPE59 Water Motion Table (p. 134) is entered in the data table with the TB commands.
If the table is not input, no water is assumed to surround the pipe. Constants not input are assumed to be
zero. If the table is input, ACELZ must also have a positive value and remain constant for all load steps. The
constant table is started by using the TB command (with Lab = WATER). Up to 196 constants may be defined
with the TBDATA commands. The constants (C1-C196) entered on the TBDATA commands (6 per command)
are:
where:
KWAVE = Wave selection key (see next section)
KCRC = Wave/current interaction key (see next section)
DEPTH = Depth of water to mud line (DEPTH > 0.0) (Length)
DENSW = Water density, w, (DENSW > 0.0) (Mass/Length3)
w = Wave direction (see Figure 2 (p. 130))
Z(j) = Z coordinate of location j of drift current measurement (see Figure 2 (p. 130)) (location must be input
starting at the ocean floor (Z(1) = -DEPTH) and ending at the water surface (Z(MAX) = 0.0). If the current
does not change with height, only W(1) needs to be defined.)
W(j) = Velocity of drift current at location j (Length/Time)

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

133

PIPE59
d(j) = Direction of drift current at location j (Degrees) (see Figure 2 (p. 130))
Re(k) = Twelve Reynolds number values (if used, all 12 must be input in ascending order)
CD(k) = Twelve corresponding normal drag coefficients (if used, all 12 must be input)
CT(k) = Twelve corresponding tangential drag coefficients (if used, all 12 must be input)
T(j) = Temperature at Z(j) water depth (Degrees)
A(i) = Wave peak-to-trough height (0.0 A(i) < DEPTH) (Length) (if KWAVE = 2, A(1) is entire wave
height and A(2) through A(5) are not used)
(i) = Wave period ((i) > 0.0) (Time/Cycle)
(i) = Adjustment for phase shift (Degrees)
WL(i) = Wave length (0.0 WL(i) < 1000.0*DEPTH) (Length)
WL(i) =

ACELZ( (i))2
2DEPTH
tanh
2
WL(i) )

(default
Use 0.0 with Stokes theory (KWAVE = 2).

Table 2 PIPE59 Water Motion Table


Constant

Meaning

1-5

KWAVE

KCRC

DEPTH

DENSW

7-12

Z(1)

W(1)

d(1)

Z(2)

W(2)

d(2)

13-18

Z(3)

W(3)

d(3)

Z(4)

W(4)

d(4)

19-24

Z(5)

W(5)

d(5)

Z(6)

W(6)

d(6)

25-30

Z(7)

W(7)

d(7)

Z(8)

W(8)

d(8)

31-36

Re(1)

Re(2)

Re(3)

Re(4)

Re(5)

Re(6)

37-42

Re(7)

Re(8)

Re(9)

Re(10)

Re(11)

Re(12)

43-48

CD(1)

CD(2)

CD(3)

CD(4)

CD(5)

CD(6)

49-54

CD(7)

CD(8)

CD(9)

CD(10)

CD(11)

CD(12)

55-60

CT(1)

CT(2)

CT(3)

CT(4)

CT(5)

CT(6)

61-66

CT(7)

CT(8)

CT(9)

CT(10)

CT(11)

CT(12)

67-72

T(1)

T(2)

T(3)

T(4)

T(5)

T(6)

73-74

T(7)

T(8)

79-82

A(1)

(1)

(1)

WL(1)

For KWAVE = 0, 1, or 2

85-88

A(2)

(2)

(2)

WL(2)

etc.

etc.

193-196

A(20)

(20)

(20)

WL(20)

79-81

X(1)/(H*T*G)

Not Used

(1)

85-86

X(2)/(H*T*G)

DPT/LO

For KWAVE = 3 (See for definitions other than (1))

91-92

X(3)/(H*T*G)

L/LO

97-98

X(4)/(H*T*G)

H/DPT

103-104

X(5)/(H*T*G)

/(G*H*T)

109

X(6)/(H*T*G)

etc.

134

For KWAVE = 2, use


only A(1), (1), (1)

etc.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE59
Constant
193

Meaning
X(20)/(H*T*G)

The distributed load applied to the pipe by the hydrodynamic effects is computed from a generalized Morison's equation. This equation includes the coefficient of normal drag (CD) (perpendicular to the element
axis) and the coefficient of tangential drag (CT), both of which are a functions of Reynolds numbers (Re).
These values are input as shown in Table 1: PIPE59 Real Constants (p. 132) and Table 2: PIPE59 Water Motion
Table (p. 134).
The Reynolds numbers are determined from the normal and tangential relative particle velocities, the pipe
geometry, the water density, and the viscosity (input as VISC). The relative particle velocities include the
effects of water motion due to waves and current, as well as motion of the pipe itself. If both Re(1) and
CD(1) are positive, the value of CD from the real constant table (Table 1: PIPE59 Real Constants (p. 132)) is ignored
and a log-log table based on Constants 31 through 54 of the water motion table (Table 2: PIPE59 Water Motion
Table (p. 134)) is used to determine CD. If this capability is to be used, the viscosity, Re, and CD constants
must be input and none may be less than or equal to zero.
Similarly, if both Re(1) and CT(1) are positive, the value of CT from the real constant table (Table 1: PIPE59
Real Constants (p. 132)) is ignored, and a log-log table based on Constants 31 through 42 and 55 through 66
of the water motion table (Table 2: PIPE59 Water Motion Table (p. 134)) is used to determine CT. If this capability is to be used, the viscosity, Re, and CT constants must be input and none may be less than or equal to
zero.
Various wave theories may be selected with the KWAVE constant of the water motion table (Table 2: PIPE59
Water Motion Table (p. 134)). These are:

Small Amplitude Wave Theory with empirical modification of depth decay function (KWAVE = 0)

Small Amplitude Airy Wave Theory without modifications (KWAVE = 1)

Stokes Fifth Order Wave Theory (KWAVE = 2)

Stream Function Wave Theory (KWAVE = 3).

The wave loadings can be altered (KEYOPT(5)) so that horizontal position has no effect on the wave-induced
forces.
Wave loading depends on the acceleration due to gravity (ACELZ), and it may not change between substeps
or load steps. Therefore, when performing an analysis using load steps with multiple substeps, the gravity
may only be "stepped on" [KBC,1] and not ramped.
With the stream function wave theory (KWAVE = 3), the wave is described by alternate Constants 79 through
193 as shown in Table 2: PIPE59 Water Motion Table (p. 134). The definitions of the constants correspond exactly
to those given in the tables in for the forty cases of ratio of wave height and water depth to the deep water
wave length. The other wave-related constants that the user inputs directly are the water density (DENSW),
water depth (DEPTH), wave direction (), and acceleration due to gravity (ACELZ). The wave height, length,
and period are inferred from the tables. The user should verify the input by comparing the interpreted results
(the columns headed DIMENSIONLESS under the STREAM FUNCTION INPUT VALUES printout) with the data
presented in the tables. Note that this wave theory uses the current value defined for time [TIME] (which
defaults to 1.0 for the first load step).

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

135

PIPE59
Several adjustments to the current profile are available with the KCRC constant of the water motion table
as shown in Figure 3 (p. 136). The adjustments are usually used only when the wave amplitude is large relative
to the water depth, such that there is significant wave/current interaction. Options include
1.

use the current profile (as input) for wave locations below the mean water level and the top current
profile value for wave locations above the mean water level (KCRC = 0)

2.

"stretch" (or compress) the current profile to the top of the wave (KCRC = 1)

3.

same as (2) but also adjust the current profile horizontally such that total flow continuity is maintained
with the input profile (KCRC = 2) (all current directions ((j)) must be the same for this option).

Figure 3 PIPE59 Velocity Profiles for Wave-current Interactions

Z
Water Surface

Mean Water
Surface
Constant (KCRC = 0)
Stretch (KCRC = 1)
Continuity (KCRC = 2)
Nonlinear Stretch (KCRC = 3)
Mud Line

Horizontal arrows represent


input velocities

Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures may be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 129). Internal pressure (PINT) and external
pressure (POUT) are input as positive values. These pressures are in addition to the linearly varying pressure
of the fluids on the inside and outside of the pipe. In handling the pressures, each element is assumed to
be capped (that is, have closed ends). The internal and external pressure loads are designed for closed-loop
static pressure environments and therefore include pressure loads on fictitious "end caps" so that the pressure
loads induce an axial stress and/or reaction in the pipe system. If a dynamic situation needs to be represented,
such as a pipe venting to a lower pressure area or the internal flow is past a constriction in the pipe, these
end cap loads may need to be modified by applying a nodal force normal to the cross-section of the pipe
with the magnitude representing the change in pressure. Alternatively, the precomputed end cap loads can
be removed using KEYOPT(8) = 1 and the appropriate end cap loads added by the user. The transverse
pressures (PX, PY, and PZ) may represent wind or drag loads (per unit length of the pipe) and are defined
in the global Cartesian directions. Positive transverse pressures act in the positive coordinate directions. The
normal component or the projected full pressure may be used (KEYOPT(9)). See the Theory Reference for the
Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for more details.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. Temperatures may have wall gradients or
diametral gradients (KEYOPT(3)). Diametral gradients are not valid for the cable option. The average wall

136

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE59
temperature at = 0 is computed as 2 * TAVG - T(180) and the average wall temperature at = -90 is
computed as 2 * TAVG - T(90). The element temperatures are assumed to be linear along the length. The
first temperature at node I (TOUT(I) or TAVG(I)) defaults to TUNIF. If all temperatures after the first are unspecified, they default to the first. If all temperatures at node I are input, and all temperatures at node J are
unspecified, the node J temperatures default to the corresponding node I temperatures. For any other pattern
of input temperatures, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
Eight temperatures (T(j)) are read as Constants 67-74 corresponding to the eight water depths (Z(j)) input
as Constants 7-30. These temperatures override any other temperature input (except TREF) unless the element
is entirely out of the water or if all eight temperatures are input as zero. The thermal load vector from these
temperatures may not be scaled in a superelement use pass if an expansion pass is to follow. Constants 31
through 66 may have zero values if desired. The temperatures input as Constants 67-74 are used to compute
a temperature-dependent viscosity based on linear interpolation (if previous constants are not all zero). In
the case of a solid cross section (inside diameter = 0.0), they are also used to compute the material properties
of the element.
For the mass matrix, the mass per unit length used for axial motion is the mass of the pipe wall (DENS), the
external insulation (DENSIN), and the internal fluid together with the added mass of any additional hardware
(CENMPL). The mass per unit length used for motion normal to the pipe is all of the above plus the added
mass of the external fluid (DENSW).
CI should be 1.0 for a circular cross section. Values for other cross sections may be found in . The user should
remember, however, that other properties of PIPE59 are based on a circular cross section.

PIPE59 Output Data


The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution

Additional element output as shown in Table 3: PIPE59 Element Output Definitions (p. 138)

Several items are illustrated in Figure 4 (p. 138). Note that the output is simplified and reduced if the cable
option, KEYOPT(1) = 1, is used.
The principal stresses are computed at the two points around the circumference where the bending stresses
are at a maximum. The principal stresses and the stress intensity include the shear force stress component.
The principal stresses and the stress intensity are based on the stresses at two extreme points on opposite
sides of the neutral axis. If KEYOPT(6) = 2, the 12-member forces and moments (6 at each end) are also
printed (in the element coordinate system).
The axial force (FX) excludes the hydrostatic force component, as does the MFORX member force (printed
if KEYOPT(6) = 2). If KWAVE = 2 or 3 (Stokes or Stream Function theory), additional wave information is also
printed. If KEYOPT(7) = 1, detailed hydrodynamic information is printed at the immersed integration points.
Angles listed in the output are measured () as shown in Figure 4 (p. 138). A general description of solution
output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

137

PIPE59

Figure 4 PIPE59 Stress Output


Torsional
Moment

SBEND
J

SAXL
ST

SH
SDIR

Shear
Force

The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:


A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
(ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R column
indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and - indicates that the item is not available.

Table 3 PIPE59 Element Output Definitions


Name

Definition

EL

Element number

NODES

Nodes - I, J

MAT

Material number

VOLU:

Volume

XC, YC, ZC

Location where results are reported

LEN

Length

PRES

Pressures PINTE (average effective internal pressure),


PX, PY, PZ, POUTE (average effective external pressure)

STH

Stress due to maximum thermal gradient through


the wall thickness

SPR2

Hoop pressure stress for code calculations

SMI, SMJ

Moment stress at nodes I and J for code calculations

SDIR

Direct (axial) stress

SBEND

Maximum bending stress at outer surface

ST

Shear stress at outer surface due to torsion

SSF

Shear stress due to shear force

S(1MX, 3MN, INTMX, EQVMX)

Maximum principal stress, minimum principal stress,


maximum stress intensity, maximum equivalent
stress (over eight points on the outside surface at
both ends of the element)

138

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE59
Name

Definition

TEMP

Temperatures TOUT(I), TIN(I), TOUT(J), TIN(J)

TEMP

Temperatures TAVG(I), T90(I), T180(I), TAVG(J), T90(J),


T180(J)

S(1, 3, INT, EQV)

Maximum principal stress, minimum principal stress,


stress intensity, equivalent stress

S(AXL, RAD, H, XH)

Axial, radial, hoop, and shear stresses

EPEL(AXL, RAD, H,
XH)

Axial, radial, hoop, and shear strains

EPTH(AXL, RAD, H)

Axial, radial, and hoop thermal strain

MFOR(X, Y, Z)

Member forces for nodes I and J (in the element


coordinate system)

MMOM(X, Y, Z)

Member moments for nodes I and J (in the element


coordinate system)

NODE

Node I or J

FAXL

Axial force (excludes the hydrostatic force)

SAXL

Axial stress (includes the hydrostatic stress)

SRAD

Radial stress

SH

Hoop stress

SINT

Stress intensity

SEQV

Equivalent stress (SAXL minus the hydrostatic stress)

EPEL(AXL, RAD, H)

Axial, radial, and hoop elastic strains (excludes the


thermal strain)

TEMP

TOUT(I), TOUT(J)

EPTHAXL

Axial thermal strains at nodes I and J

VR, VZ

Radial and vertical fluid particle velocities (VR is always > 0)

AR, AZ

Radial and vertical fluid particle accelerations

PHDYN

Dynamic fluid pressure head

ETA

Wave amplitude over integration point

TFLUID

Fluid temperature (printed if VISC is nonzero)

VISC

Viscosity

REN, RET

Normal and tangential Reynolds numbers (if VISC is


nonzero)

CT, CD, CM

Input coefficients evaluated at Reynolds numbers

CTW, CDW

CT*DENSW*DO/2, CD*DENSW*DO/2

CMW

CM*DENSW*PI*DO**2/4

URT, URN

Tangential (parallel to element axis) and normal relative velocity

ABURN

Vector sum of normal (URN) velocities

AN

Accelerations normal to the element

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

139

PIPE59
Name

Definition

FX, FY, FZ

Hydrodynamic forces tangential and normal to element axis

ARGU

Effective position of integration point (radians)

1.

Output only for the pipe option (KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 2)

2.

If KEYOPT(3) = 0 or if KEYOPT(1) = 1

3.

If KEYOPT(3) = 1

4.

Output only for the pipe option and the item repeats at 0, 45, 90, 135, 180, 225, 270, 315 at node I,
then at node J (all at the outer surface)

5.

Output only for the pipe option (KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 2) and if KEYOPT(6) = 2

6.

Output only for the cable option (KEYOPT(1) = 1)

7.

Output only if KEYOPT(6) = 2

8.

Hydrodynamic solution (if KEYOPT(7) = 1 for immersed elements at integration points)

9.

Available only at centroid as a *GET item.

Table 4: PIPE59 Item and Sequence Numbers (Node I) (p. 140) lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in Basic Analysis Guide and
The Item and Sequence Number Table of this manual for more information. The following notation is used
in Table 4: PIPE59 Item and Sequence Numbers (Node I) (p. 140):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 3: PIPE59 Element Output Definitions (p. 138)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
E
sequence number for single-valued or constant element data
I,J
sequence number for data at nodes I and J

Table 4 PIPE59 Item and Sequence Numbers (Node I)


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Circumferential Location
Item

SAXL

LS

SRAD

45

90

13

17

21

25

29

LS

10

14

18

22

26

30

SH

LS

11

15

19

23

27

31

SXH

LS

12

16

20

24

28

32

EPELAXL

LEPEL

13

17

21

25

29

EPELRAD

LEPEL

10

14

18

22

26

30

EPELH

LEPEL

11

15

19

23

27

31

EPELXH

LEPEL

12

16

20

24

28

32

140

135 180 225 270 315

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE59
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Circumferential Location
Item

EPTHAXL

LEPTH

EPTHRAD

45

90

135 180 225 270 315

13

17

21

25

29

LEPTH

10

14

18

22

26

30

EPTHH

LEPTH

11

15

19

23

27

31

MFORX

SMISC

MFORY

SMISC

MFORZ

SMISC

MMOMX

SMISC

MMOMY

SMISC

MMOMZ

SMISC

SDIR

SMISC

13

ST

SMISC

14

S1

NMISC

11

16

21

26

31

36

S3

NMISC

13

18

23

28

33

38

SINT

NMISC

14

19

24

29

34

39

SEQV

NMISC

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

SBEND

NMISC

88

SSF

NMISC

89

TOUT

LBFE

TIN

LBFE

Table 5 PIPE59 Item and Sequence Numbers (Node J)


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Circumferential Location
Item

SAXL

LS

SRAD

45

90

135 180 225 270 315

33

37

41

45

49

53

57

61

LS

34

38

42

46

50

54

58

62

SH

LS

35

39

43

47

51

55

59

63

SXH

LS

36

40

44

48

52

56

60

64

EPELAXL

LEPEL

33

37

41

45

49

53

57

61

EPELRAD

LEPEL

34

38

42

46

50

54

58

62

EPELH

LEPEL

35

39

43

47

51

55

59

63

EPELXH

LEPEL

36

40

44

48

52

56

60

64

EPTHAXL

LEPTH

33

37

41

45

49

53

57

61

EPTHRAD

LEPTH

34

38

42

46

50

54

58

62

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

141

PIPE59
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Circumferential Location
Item

EPTHH

LEPTH

MFORX

45

90

135 180 225 270 315

35

39

43

47

51

55

59

63

SMISC

MFORY

SMISC

MFORZ

SMISC

MMOMX

SMISC

10

MMOMY

SMISC

11

MMOMZ

SMISC

12

SDIR

SMISC

15

ST

SMISC

16

S1

NMISC

41

46

51

56

61

66

71

76

S3

NMISC

43

48

53

58

63

68

73

78

SINT

NMISC

44

49

54

59

64

69

74

79

SEQV

NMISC

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

SBEND

NMISC

90

SSF

NMISC

91

TOUT

LBFE

12

10

11

TIN

LBFE

16

13

14

15

Table 6 PIPE59 Item and Sequence Numbers (Pipe Options)


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and
ESOL Command
Input
Item

STH

SMISC

17

PINTE

SMISC

18

PX

SMISC

19

PY

SMISC

20

PZ

SMISC

21

POUTE

SMISC

22

SPR2

NMISC

81

SMI

NMISC

82

SMJ

NMISC

83

S1MX

NMISC

84

S3MN

NMISC

85

SINTMX

NMISC

86

142

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE59
Output
Quantity
Name
SEQVMX

ETABLE and
ESOL Command
Input
Item
NMISC

E
87

Table 7 PIPE59 Item and Sequence Numbers (Cable Option)


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

Node
I

Node
J

SAXL

LS

SRAD

LS

SH

LS

EPELAXL

LEPEL

EPELRAD

LEPEL

EPELH

LEPEL

EPTHAXL

LEPTH

TOUT

LBFE

TIN

LBFE

13

SINT

NMISC

SEQV

NMISC

10

FAXL

SMISC

STH

SMISC

13

PINTE

SMISC

14

PX

SMISC

15

PY

SMISC

16

PZ

SMISC

17

POUTE

SMISC

18

Table 8: PIPE59 Item and Sequence Numbers (Additional Output) (p. 143) lists additional print and post data file
output available through the ETABLE command if KEYOPT(7) = 1.

Table 8 PIPE59 Item and Sequence Numbers (Additional Output)


Output Quantity Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

E- First Integration Point

E- Second Integration Point

GLOBAL COORD

NMISC

N + 1, N + 2, N
+3

N + 31, N + 32,
N + 33

VR

NMISC

N+4

N + 34

VZ

NMISC

N+5

N + 35

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

143

PIPE59
ETABLE and ESOL Command Input

Output Quantity Name

Item

E- First Integration Point

E- Second Integration Point

AR

NMISC

N+6

N + 36

AZ

NMISC

N+7

N + 37

PHDY

NMISC

N+8

N + 38

ETA

NMISC

N+9

N + 39

TFLUID

NMISC

N + 10

N + 40

VISC

NMISC

N + 11

N + 41

REN

NMISC

N + 12

N + 42

RET

NMISC

N + 13

N + 43

CT

NMISC

N + 14

N + 44

CTW

NMISC

N + 15

N + 45

URT

NMISC

N + 16

N + 46

FX

NMISC

N + 17

N + 47

CD

NMISC

N + 18

N + 48

CDW

NMISC

N + 19

N + 49

URN

NMISC

N + 20, N + 21

N + 50, N + 51

ABURN

NMISC

N + 22

N + 52

FY

NMISC

N + 23

N + 53

CM

NMISC

N + 24

N + 54

CMW

NMISC

N + 25

N + 55

AN

NMISC

N + 26, N + 27

N + 56, N + 57

FZ

NMISC

N + 28

N + 58

ARGU

NMISC

N + 29

N + 59

Note
For the pipe option (KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 2): N = 99. For the cable option (KEYOPT(1) = 1): N = 10.

Material Properties -- WATER Specifications


TB,WATER (water motion table data for PIPE59)
NTEMP:
Not used.
NPTS:
Not used.
TBOPT:
Not used.

144

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PIPE59

PIPE59 Assumptions and Restrictions

The pipe must not have a zero length. In addition, the O.D. must not be less than or equal to zero and
the I.D. must not be less than zero.

Elements input at or near the water surface should be small in length relative to the wave length.

Neither end of the element may be input below the mud line (ocean floor). Integration points that move
below the mud line are presumed to have no hydrodynamic forces acting on them.

If the element is used out of water, the water motion table (Table 2: PIPE59 Water Motion Table (p. 134))
need not be included.

The element should also be used with caution in the reduced transient dynamic analysis since this
analysis type ignores the element load vector. Fluid damping, if any, should be handled via the hydrodynamic load vector rather than (mass matrix) damping.

When performing a transient analysis, the solution may be unstable with small time steps due to the
nature of Morrison's equation.

The applied thermal gradient is assumed to vary linearly along the length of the element.

The same water motion table (Table 2: PIPE59 Water Motion Table (p. 134)) should not be used for different
wave theories in the same problem.

The lumped mass matrix formulation [LUMPM,ON] is not allowed for PIPE59 when using "added mass"
on the outside of the pipe (CI 0.0).

PIPE59 Product Restrictions


There are no product-specific restrictions for this element.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

145

146

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SHELL63
Elastic Shell
MP ME ST PR PRN DS <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Product Restrictions

SHELL63 Element Description


Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a current-technology element such as SHELL181 (KEYOPT(3) = 2).
SHELL63 has both bending and membrane capabilities. Both in-plane and normal loads are permitted. The
element has six degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions and rotations
about the nodal x, y, and z-axes. Stress stiffening and large deflection capabilities are included. A consistent
tangent stiffness matrix option is available for use in large deflection (finite rotation) analyses. See SHELL63
for more details about this element. Similar elements are SHELL181 (plastic capability) and SHELL281 (midside
node capability). The ETCHG command converts SHELL157 elements to SHELL63.

Figure 1 SHELL63 Geometry


zIJ
z
2

5
7

yIJ

y
6

I
1

Y
X

2
3

K,L

xIJ

I
J
Triangular Option

xIJ = Element x-axis if ESYS is not supplied.


x = Element x-axis if ESYS is supplied.

SHELL63 Input Data


The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 147). The
element is defined by four nodes, four thicknesses, an elastic foundation stiffness, and the orthotropic material properties. Orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element
coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems. The element x-axis may be rotated by
an angle THETA (in degrees).

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

147

SHELL63
The thickness is assumed to vary smoothly over the area of the element, with the thickness input at the four
nodes. If the element has a constant thickness, only TK(I) need be input. If the thickness is not constant, all
four thicknesses must be input.
The elastic foundation stiffness (EFS) is defined as the pressure required to produce a unit normal deflection
of the foundation. The elastic foundation capability is bypassed if EFS is less than, or equal to, zero.
For certain nonhomogeneous or sandwich shell applications, the following real constants are provided: RMI
is the ratio of the bending moment of inertia to be used to that calculated from the input thicknesses. RMI
defaults to 1.0. CTOP and CBOT are the distances from the middle surface to the extreme fibers to be used
for stress evaluations. Both CTOP and CBOT are positive, assuming that the middle surface is between the
fibers used for stress evaluation. If not input, stresses are based on the input thicknesses. ADMSUA is the
added mass per unit area.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures may be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 147). Positive pressures act into the element.
Because shell edge pressures are input on a per-unit-length basis, per-unit-area quantities must be multiplied
by the shell thickness. The lateral pressure loading may be an equivalent (lumped) element load applied at
the nodes (KEYOPT(6) = 0) or distributed over the face of the element (KEYOPT(6) = 2). The equivalent element
load produces more accurate stress results with flat elements representing a curved surface or elements
supported on an elastic foundation since certain fictitious bending stresses are eliminated.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the "corner" locations (1-8) shown in Figure 1 (p. 147).
The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to
T1. If only T1 and T2 are input, T1 is used for T1, T2, T3, and T4, while T2 (as input) is used for T5, T6, T7,
and T8. For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
KEYOPT(1) is available for neglecting the membrane stiffness or the bending stiffness, if desired. A reduced
out-of-plane mass matrix is also used when the bending stiffness is neglected.
KEYOPT(2) is used to activate the consistent tangent stiffness matrix (that is, a matrix composed of the main
tangent stiffness matrix plus the consistent stress stiffness matrix) in large deflection analyses [NLGEOM,ON].
You can often obtain more rapid convergence in a geometrically nonlinear analysis, such as a nonlinear
buckling or postbuckling analysis, by activating this option. However, you should not use this option if you
are using the element to simulate a rigid link or a group of coupled nodes. The resulting abrupt changes in
stiffness within the structure make the consistent tangent stiffness matrix unsuitable for such applications.
KEYOPT(3) allows you to include (KEYOPT(3) = 0 or 2) or suppress (KEYOPT(3) = 1) extra displacement shapes.
It also allows you to choose the type of in-plane rotational stiffness used:

KEYOPT(3) = 0 or 1 activates a spring-type in-plane rotational stiffness about the element z-axis

KEYOPT(3) = 2 activates a more realistic in-plane rotational stiffness (Allman rotational stiffness - the
program uses default penalty parameter values of d1 = 1.0E-6 and d2 = 1.0E-3).

Using the Allman stiffness will often enhance convergence behavior in large deflection (finite rotation)
analyses of planar shell structures (that is, flat shells or flat regions of shells).
KEYOPT(7) allows a reduced mass matrix formulation (rotational degrees of freedom terms deleted). This
option is useful for improved bending stresses in thin members under mass loading.
KEYOPT(8) allows a reduced stress stiffness matrix (rotational degrees of freedom deleted). This option can
be useful for calculating improved mode shapes and a more accurate load factor in linear buckling analyses
of certain curved shell structures.

148

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SHELL63
KEYOPT(11) = 2 is used to store midsurface results in the results file for single or multi-layer shell elements.
If you use SHELL,MID, you will see these calculated values, rather than the average of the TOP and BOTTOM
results. You should use this option to access these correct midsurface results (membrane results) for those
analyses where averaging TOP and BOTTOM results is inappropriate; examples include midsurface stresses
and strains with nonlinear material behavior, and midsurface results after mode combinations that involve
squaring operations such as in spectrum analyses.
A summary of the element input is given in "SHELL63 Input Summary" (p. 149). A general description of element
input is given in Element Input.

SHELL63 Input Summary


Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Real Constants
TK(I), TK(J), TK(K), TK(L), EFS, THETA,
RMI, CTOP, CBOT, (Blank), (Blank), (Blank),
(Blank), (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), (Blank),
ADMSUA
See Table 1: SHELL63 Real Constants (p. 151) for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, (PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ), ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX,
THSY, THSZ), DENS, GXY, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures -face 1 (I-J-K-L) (bottom, in +Z direction), face 2 (I-J-K-L) (top, in -Z direction),
face 3 (J-I), face 4 (K-J), face 5 (L-K), face 6 (I-L)
Body Loads
Temperatures -T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8
Special Features
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
Element stiffness:
0 -Bending and membrane stiffness
1 -Membrane stiffness only
2 -Bending stiffness only

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

149

SHELL63
KEYOPT(2)
Stress stiffening option:
0 -Use only the main tangent stiffness matrix when NLGEOM is ON. (Stress stiffening effects used in
linear buckling or other linear prestressed analyses must be activated separately with PSTRES,ON.)
1 -Use the consistent tangent stiffness matrix (that is, a matrix composed of the main tangent stiffness
matrix plus the consistent stress stiffness matrix) when NLGEOM is ON and when KEYOPT(1) = 0.
(SSTIF,ON will be ignored for this element when KEYOPT(2) = 1 is activated.) Note that if SOLCONTROL
is ON and NLGEOM is ON, KEYOPT(2) is automatically set to 1; that is, the consistent tangent will be
used.
2 -Use to turn off consistent tangent stiffness matrix (i.e., a matrix composed of the main tangent
stiffness matrix plus the consistent stress stiffness matrix) when SOLCONTROL is ON. Sometimes it
is necessary to turn off the consistent tangent stiffness matrix if the element is used to simulate rigid
bodies by using a very large real constant number . KEYOPT(2) = 2 is the same as KEYOPT(2) = 0,
however, KEYOPT(2) = 0 is controlled by SOLCONTROL, ON or OFF, while KEYOPT(2) = 2 is independent of SOLCONTROL.
KEYOPT(3)
Extra displacement shapes:
0 -Include extra displacement shapes, and use spring-type in-plane rotational stiffness about the element
z-axis (the program automatically adds a small stiffness to prevent numerical instability for nonwarped elements if KEYOPT(1) = 0).

Note
For models with large rotation about the in-plane direction, KEYOPT(3) = 0 results in some
transfer of moment directly to ground.
1 -Suppress extra displacement shapes, and use spring-type in-plane rotational stiffness about the element z-axis (the program automatically adds a small stiffness to prevent numerical instability for
non-warped elements if KEYOPT(1) = 0).
2 -Include extra displacement shapes, and use the Allman in-plane rotational stiffness about the element
z-axis). See the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications.
KEYOPT(5)
Extra stress output:
0 -Basic element printout
2 -Nodal stress printout
KEYOPT(6)
Pressure loading:

150

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SHELL63
0 -Reduced pressure loading (must be used if KEYOPT(1) = 1)
2 -Consistent pressure loading
KEYOPT(7)
Mass matrix:
0 -Consistent mass matrix
1 -Reduced mass matrix
KEYOPT(8)
Stress stiffness matrix:
0 -"Nearly" consistent stress stiffness matrix (default)
1 -Reduced stress stiffness matrix
KEYOPT(9)
Element coordinate system defined:
0 -No user subroutine to define element coordinate system
4 -Element x-axis located by user subroutine USERAN

Note
See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for user written subroutines
KEYOPT(11)
Specify data storage:
0 -Store data for TOP and BOTTOM surfaces only
2 -Store data for TOP, BOTTOM, and MID surfaces

Table 1 SHELL63 Real Constants


No.

Name

Description

TK(I)

Shell thickness at node I

TK(J)

Shell thickness at node J

TK(K)

Shell thickness at node K

TK(L)

Shell thickness at node L

EFS

Elastic foundation stiffness

THETA

Element X-axis rotation

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

151

SHELL63
No.

Name

Description

RMI

Bending moment of inertia ratio

CTOP

Distance from mid surface to top

CBOT

Distance from mid surface to bottom

10, ..., 18

(Blank)

--

19

ADMSUA

Added mass/unit area

SHELL63 Output Data


The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution

Additional element output as shown in Table 2: SHELL63 Element Output Definitions (p. 153)

Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 152). Printout includes the moments about the x face (MX), the
moments about the y face (MY), and the twisting moment (MXY). The moments are calculated per unit
length in the element coordinate system. The element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate
system. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for
ways to view results.

Figure 2 SHELL63 Stress Output


MXY
MX
SY

TX

zIJ

SX
z

TXY

MY

MXY

TXY
L

SX(TOP)
SX (MID)
SX (BOT)

TY

y
yIJ
K

xIJ

xIJ = Element x-axis if ESYS is not supplied.


x = Element x-axis if ESYS is supplied.

152

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SHELL63
The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:
A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
(ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R column
indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and - indicates that the item is not available.

Table 2 SHELL63 Element Output Definitions


Name

Definition

EL

Element Number

NODES

Nodes - I, J, K, L

MAT

Material number

AREA

AREA

XC, YC, ZC

Location where results are reported

PRES

Pressures P1 at nodes I, J, K, L; P2 at I, J, K, L; P3
at J, I; P4 at K, J; P5 at L, K; P6 at I, L

TEMP

Temperatures T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8

T(X, Y, XY)

In-plane element X, Y, and XY forces

M(X, Y, XY)

Element X, Y, and XY moments

FOUND.PRESS

Foundation pressure (if nonzero)

LOC

Top, middle, or bottom

S:X, Y, Z, XY

Combined membrane and bending stresses

S:1, 2, 3

Principal stress

S:INT

Stress intensity

S:EQV

Equivalent stress

EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY

Average elastic strain

EPEL:EQV

Equivalent elastic strain [2]

EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY

Average thermal strain

EPTH:EQV

Equivalent thermal strain [2]

1.

Available only at centroid as a *GET item.

2.

The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio: for elastic and thermal this value is set by the
user (MP,PRXY).

Table 3 SHELL63 Miscellaneous Element Output


Description
Nodal Stress Solution
1.

Names of Items Output


TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY), SINT,
SEQV

Output at each node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2, repeats each location

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

153

SHELL63
Table 4: SHELL63 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 154) lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and
The Item and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more information. The following notation is used
in Table 4: SHELL63 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 154):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: SHELL63 Element Output Definitions (p. 153)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
E
sequence number for single-valued or constant element data
I,J,K,L
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,K,L

Table 4 SHELL63 Item and Sequence Numbers


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

TX

SMISC

TY

SMISC

TXY

SMISC

MX

SMISC

MY

SMISC

MXY

SMISC

P1

SMISC

10

11

12

P2

SMISC

13

14

15

16

P3

SMISC

18

17

P4

SMISC

20

19

P5

SMISC

22

21

P6

SMISC

23

24

Top
S:1

NMISC

11

16

S:2

NMISC

12

17

S:3

NMISC

13

18

S:INT

NMISC

14

19

S:EQV

NMISC

10

15

20

Bot
S:1

NMISC

21

26

31

36

S:2

NMISC

22

27

32

37

S:3

NMISC

23

28

33

38

S:INT

NMISC

24

29

34

39

154

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SHELL63
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

S:EQV

NMISC

25

30

35

40

SHELL63 Assumptions and Restrictions

Zero area elements are not allowed. This occurs most often whenever the elements are not numbered
properly.

Zero thickness elements or elements tapering down to a zero thickness at any corner are not allowed.

The applied transverse thermal gradient is assumed to vary linearly through the thickness and vary bilinearly over the shell surface.

An assemblage of flat shell elements can produce a good approximation of a curved shell surface
provided that each flat element does not extend over more than a 15 arc. If an elastic foundation
stiffness is input, one-fourth of the total is applied at each node. Shear deflection is not included in this
thin-shell element.

A triangular element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L node numbers as described in Triangle,
Prism, and Tetrahedral Elements. The extra shapes are automatically deleted for triangular elements so
that the membrane stiffness reduces to a constant strain formulation. For large deflection analyses, if
KEYOPT(1) = 1 (membrane stiffness only), the element must be triangular.

For KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 2, the four nodes defining the element should lie as close as possible to a flat
plane (for maximum accuracy), but a moderate amount of warping is permitted. For KEYOPT(1) = 1, the
warping limit is very restrictive. In either case, an excessively warped element may produce a warning
or error message. In the case of warping errors, triangular elements should be used (see Triangle, Prism,
and Tetrahedral Elements). Shell element warping tests are described in detail in tables of Applicability
of Warping Tests and Warping Factor Limits in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications.

If the lumped mass matrix formulation is specified [LUMPM,ON], the effect of the implied offsets on
the mass matrix is ignored for warped SHELL63 elements.

SHELL63 Product Restrictions


When used in the product(s) listed below, the stated product-specific restrictions apply to this element in
addition to the general assumptions and restrictions given in the previous section.
ANSYS Professional

The DAMP material property is not allowed.

The only special features allowed are stress stiffening and large deflection.

KEYOPT(2) can only be set to 0 (default).

KEYOPT(9) can only be set to 0 (default).

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

155

156

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PLANE82
2-D 8-Node Structural Solid
MP ME ST PR PRN DS <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Product Restrictions

PLANE82 Element Description


Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a current-technology element such as PLANE183.
PLANE82 provides accurate results for mixed (quadrilateral-triangular) automatic meshes and can tolerate
irregular shapes without as much loss of accuracy. The eight-node elements have compatible displacement
shapes and are well suited to model curved boundaries.
The 8-node element is defined by eight nodes having two degrees of freedom at each node: translations in
the nodal x and y directions. The element may be used as a plane element or as an axisymmetric element.
The element has plasticity, creep, swelling, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain capabilities.
Various printout options are also available. See SOLID273 for a description of an axisymmetric element which
accepts nonaxisymmetric loading.

Figure 1 PLANE82 Geometry


L

K, L, O

O
4
Y
(or axial)

P
N

X (or radial)

I
M
Tri Option

M
1

PLANE82 Input Data


The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 157).
A triangular-shaped element may be formed by defining the same node number for nodes K, L and O. Besides
the nodes, the element input data includes a thickness (TK) (for the plane stress option only) and the orthotropic material properties. Orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions.
The element coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures may be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 157). Positive pressures act into the element.
Temperatures and fluences may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I)
defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). If all corner node temperatures
are specified, each midside node temperature defaults to the average temperature of its adjacent corner
nodes. For any other input temperature pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. Similar defaults
occurs for fluence except that zero is used instead of TUNIF.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

157

PLANE82
The nodal forces, if any, should be input per unit of depth for a plane analysis (except for KEYOPT(3) = 3)
and on a full 360 basis for an axisymmetric analysis. KEYOPT(5) and KEYOPT(6) parameters provide various
element printout options (see Element Solution).
You cannot set initial state conditions (INISTATE) using this element. You can set initial state conditions
using current-technology elements (such as LINK180,SHELL181). To continue using initial state conditions
in future versions of ANSYS, consider using a current element technology. For more information, see Legacy
vs. Current Element Technologies in the Element Reference. For more information about setting initial state
values, see the INISTATE command documentation and Initial State Loading in the Basic Analysis Guide.
You can include the effects of pressure load stiffness in a geometric nonlinear analysis using SOLCONTROL,,,INCP. Pressure load stiffness effects are included in linear eigenvalue buckling automatically. If an unsymmetric
matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, use NROPT,UNSYM.
A summary of the element input is given in "PLANE82 Input Summary" (p. 158). A general description of element
input is given in Element Input. For axisymmetric applications see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements.

PLANE82 Input Summary


Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
None, if KEYOPT (3) = 0, 1, or 2
THK - Thickness, if KEYOPT (3) = 3
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ), DENS, GXY, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures -face 1 (J-I), face 2 (K-J), face 3 (I-K), face 4 (I-L)
Body Loads
Temperatures -T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P)
Fluences -FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N), FL(O), FL(P)
Special Features
Plasticity (BISO, MISO, BKIN, MKIN, KINH, DP, ANISO)
Creep (CREEP, RATE)
Swelling (SWELL)
Elasticity (MELAS)
Other material (USER)
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain

158

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PLANE82
Birth and death
Adaptive descent
Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command.
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 -Plane stress
1 -Axisymmetric
2 -Plane strain (Z strain = 0.0)
3 -Plane stress with thickness (TK) real constant input
KEYOPT(5)
Extra element output:
0 -Basic element solution
1 -Repeat basic solution for all integration points
2 -Nodal Stress Solution
KEYOPT(6)
Extra surface output:
0 -Basic element solution
1 -Surface solution for face I-J also
2 -Surface solution for both faces I-J and K-L also (surface solution valid for linear materials only)
3 -Nonlinear solution at each integration point also
4 -Surface solution for faces with nonzero pressure

PLANE82 Output Data


The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution

Additional element output as shown in Table 1: PLANE82 Element Output Definitions (p. 160)

Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 160).

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

159

PLANE82
The element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. Surface stresses are available
on any face. Surface stresses on face IJ, for example, are defined parallel and perpendicular to the IJ line
and along the Z axis for a plane analysis or in the hoop direction for an axisymmetric analysis. A general
description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view
results.

Figure 2 PLANE82 Stress Output


L

SY
P
SX

Y
(or axial)

I
X (or radial)

The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:


A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
(ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R column
indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and - indicates that the item is not available.

Table 1 PLANE82 Element Output Definitions


Name

Definition

EL

Element Number

NODES

Corner nodes - I, J, K, L

MAT

Material number

THICK

Average thickness

VOLU:

Volume

XC, YC

Location where results are reported

PRES

Pressures P1 at nodes J,I; P2 at K,J; P3 at L,K; P4 at


I,L

TEMP

Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P)

FLUEN

Fluences FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N), FL(O),


FL(P)

S:X, Y, Z, XY

Stresses (SZ = 0.0 for plane stress elements)

S:1, 2, 3

Principal stresses

S:INT

Stress intensity

S:EQV

Equivalent stress

EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY

Elastic strains

160

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PLANE82
Name

Definition

EPEL:1, 2, 3

Principal elastic strains

EPEL:EQV

Equivalent elastic strain [4]

EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY

Average thermal strains

EPTH:EQV

Equivalent thermal strain [4]

EPPL:X, Y, XY, Z

Average plastic strains

EPPL:EQV

Equivalent plastic strain [4]

EPCR:X, Y, XY, Z

Average creep strains

EPCR:EQV

Equivalent creep strain [4]

EPSW:

Swelling strain

NL:EPEQ

Equivalent plastic strain

NL:SRAT

Ratio of trial stress to stress on yield surface

NL:SEPL

Equivalent stress on stress-strain curve

NL:HPRES

Hydrostatic pressure

FACE

Face label

EPEL(PAR, PER, Z)

Surface elastic strains (parallel, perpendicular, Z or


hoop)

TEMP

Surface average temperature

S(PAR, PER, Z)

Surface stresses (parallel, perpendicular, Z or hoop)

SINT

Surface stress intensity

SEQV

Surface equivalent stress

LOCI:X, Y, Z

Integration point locations

1.

Surface output (if KEYOPT(6) is 1, 2 or 4)

2.

Nonlinear solution (if the element has a nonlinear material)

3.

Available only at centroid as a *GET item.

4.

The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio: for elastic and thermal this value is set by the
user (MP,PRXY); for plastic and creep this value is set at 0.5.

Table 2 PLANE82 Miscellaneous Element Output


Description

Names of Items Output

Nonlinear Integration Pt. Solution

EPPL, EPEQ, SRAT, SEPL, HPRES, EPCR, EPSW

Integration Point Stress Solution

TEMP, SINT, SEQV, EPEL, S

Nodal Stress Solution

TEMP, S, SINT, SEQV

1.

Output at each integration point, if the element has a nonlinear material and KEYOPT(6) = 3

2.

Output at each integration point, if KEYOPT(5) = 1

3.

Output at each vertex node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

161

PLANE82

Note
For axisymmetric solutions, the X, Y, XY, and Z stress and strain outputs correspond to the radial,
axial, in-plane shear, and hoop stresses and strains.
Table 3: PLANE82 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 162) lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See Creating an Element Table in the Basic Analysis Guide and The
Item and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more information. The following notation is used in
Table 3: PLANE82 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 162):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: PLANE82 Element Output Definitions (p. 160)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
E
sequence number for single-valued or constant element data
I,J,...,P
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,...,P

Table 3 PLANE82 Item and Sequence Numbers


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

P1

SMISC

P2

SMISC

P3

SMISC

P4

SMISC

S:1

NMISC

11

16

S:2

NMISC

12

17

S:3

NMISC

13

18

S:INT

NMISC

14

19

S:EQV

NMISC

10

15

20

FLUEN

NMISC

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

THICK

NMISC

29

See Surface Solution in this manual for the item and sequence numbers for surface output for the ETABLE
command.

PLANE82 Assumptions and Restrictions

The area of the element must be positive.

The element must lie in a global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 157) and the Y-axis must be the axis
of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses. An axisymmetric structure should be modeled in the +X quadrants.

162

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

PLANE82

A face with a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies linearly, rather than parabolically, along that face. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for
more information about the use of midside nodes.

PLANE82 Product Restrictions


When used in the product(s) listed below, the stated product-specific restrictions apply to this element in
addition to the general assumptions and restrictions given in the previous section.
ANSYS Professional

The DAMP material property is not allowed.

Fluence body loads are not applicable.

The only special feature allowed is stress stiffening.

KEYOPT(6) = 3 is not applicable.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

163

164

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SOLID92
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Product Restrictions

SOLID92 Element Description


Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a current-technology element such as SOLID187.
SOLID92 has a quadratic displacement behavior and is well suited to model irregular meshes (such as produced
from various CAD/CAM systems).
The element is defined by ten nodes having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the
nodal x, y, and z directions. The element also has plasticity, creep, swelling, stress stiffening, large deflection,
and large strain capabilities.

Figure 1 SOLID92 Geometry


L
4
R

P
Q

O
X

K
N

Z
1

SOLID92 Input Data


The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 165).
Beside the nodes, the element input data includes the orthotropic material properties. Orthotropic material
directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element coordinate system orientation is
as described in Coordinate Systems.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures may be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 165). Positive pressures act into the element.
Temperatures and fluences may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I)
defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). If all corner node temperatures
are specified, each midside node temperature defaults to the average temperature of its adjacent corner
nodes. For any other input temperature pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. Similar defaults
occurs for fluence except that zero is used instead of TUNIF.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

165

SOLID92
You cannot set initial state conditions (INISTATE) using this element. You can set initial state conditions
using current-technology elements only (such as LINK180,SHELL181). To continue using initial state conditions
in future versions of ANSYS, consider using a current element technology. For more information, see Legacy
vs. Current Element Technologies in the Element Reference. For more information about setting initial state
values, see the INISTATE command documentation and Initial State Loading in the Basic Analysis Guide.
You can include the effects of pressure load stiffness in a geometric nonlinear analysis using SOLCONTROL,,,INCP. Pressure load stiffness effects are included in linear eigenvalue buckling automatically. If an unsymmetric
matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, use NROPT,UNSYM.
A summary of the element input is given in "SOLID92 Input Summary" (p. 166). A general description of element
input is given in Element Input.

SOLID92 Input Summary


Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ), PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY,
NUYZ, NUXZ), DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures -face 1 (J-I-K), face 2 (I-J-L), face 3 (J-K-L), face 4 (K-I-L)
Body Loads
Temperatures -T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P), T(Q), T(R)
Fluences -FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N), FL(O), FL(P), FL(Q), FL(R)
Special Features
Plasticity (BISO, MISO, BKIN, MKIN, KINH, DP, ANISO)
Creep (CREEP, RATE)
Swelling (SWELL)
Elasticity (MELAS)
Other material (USER)
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Birth and death
Adaptive descent
Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command.
KEYOPT(5)
Extra element output:

166

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SOLID92
0 -Basic element printout
1 -Integration point printout
2 -Nodal stress printout
KEYOPT(6)
Extra surface output:
0 -Basic element printout
4 -Surface printout for faces with nonzero pressure

SOLID92 Output Data


The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution

Additional element output as shown in Table 1: SOLID92 Element Output Definitions (p. 168)

Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 167). The element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. The surface stress outputs are in the surface coordinate system and are available for any
face (KEYOPT(6)). The coordinate system for face J-I-K is shown in Figure 2 (p. 167). The other surface coordinate
systems follow similar orientations as indicated by the pressure face node description. Surface stress printout
is valid only if the conditions described in Element Solution are met. A general description of solution output
is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.

Figure 2 SOLID92 Stress Output


L

SY
R

SX
Q

Y
SZ

X
Z

M
Surface Coordinate System

y
J

The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:


A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
(ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R column
indicates the availability of the items in the results file.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

167

SOLID92
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and - indicates that the item is not available.

Table 1 SOLID92 Element Output Definitions


Name

Definition

EL

Element Number

NODES

Corner nodes - I, J, K, L

MAT

Material number

VOLU:

Volume

XC, YC, ZC

Location where results are reported

PRES

Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, K; P2 at I, J, L; P3 at J, K,
L; P4 at K, I, L

TEMP

Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)

FLUEN

Fluences FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N), FL(O),


FL(P), FL(Q), FL(R)

S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ

Stresses

S:1, 2, 3

Principal stresses

S:INT

Stress intensity

S:EQV

Equivalent stress

EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,


XZ

Elastic strains

EPEL:1, 2, 3

Principal elastic strains

EPEL:EQV

Equivalent elastic strains [4]

EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,


XZ

Thermal strains

EPTH:EQV

Equivalent thermal strains [4]

EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,


XZ

Plastic strains

EPPL:EQV

Equivalent plastic strains [4]

EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,


XZ

Creep strains

EPCR:EQV

Equivalent creep strains [4]

EPSW:

Swelling strain

NL:EPEQ

Average equivalent plastic strain

NL:SRAT

Ratio of trial stress to stress on yield surface

NL:SEPL

Equivalent stress from stress-strain curve

NL:HPRES

Hydrostatic pressure

FACE

Face label

TRI

Nodes on this face

AREA

Face area

TEMP

Face average temperature

168

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SOLID92
Name

Definition

EPEL(X, Y, XY)

Surface elastic strains

PRES

Surface pressure

S(X, Y, XY)

Surface stresses

S(1, 2, 3)

Surface principal stresses

SINT

Surface stress intensity

SEQV

Surface equivalent stress

LOCI:X, Y, Z

Integration point locations

1.

Nonlinear solution (output if the element has a nonlinear material)

2.

Surface output (if KEYOPT(6) = 4 and a nonzero pressure face)

3.

Available only at centroid as a *GET item.

4.

The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio: for elastic and thermal this value is set by the
user (MP,PRXY); for plastic and creep this value is set at 0.5.

Table 2 SOLID92 Miscellaneous Element Output


Description

Names of Items Output

Integration Point Stress Solution

TEMP, SINT, SEQV, EPEL, S, EPPL,


EPCR, EPSW, EPEQ, SRAT, SEPL,
HPRES

Nodal Stress Solution

LOCATION, TEMP, SINT, SEQV, S

1.

Output at each integration point, if KEYOPT(5) = 1

2.

Output at each vertex node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2

Table 3: SOLID92 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 169) lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and
The Item and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more information. The following notation is used
in Table 3: SOLID92 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 169):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: SOLID92 Element Output Definitions (p. 168)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
I,J,...,R
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,...,R

Table 3 SOLID92 Item and Sequence Numbers


Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

M,...,R

P1

SMISC

P2

SMISC

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

169

SOLID92
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

M,...,R

P3

SMISC

P4

SMISC

11

10

12

S:1

NMISC

11

16

S:2

NMISC

12

17

S:3

NMISC

13

18

S:INT

NMISC

14

19

S:EQV

NMISC

10

15

20

See Surface Solution in this manual for the item and sequence numbers for surface output for the ETABLE
command.

SOLID92 Assumptions and Restrictions

The element must not have a zero volume. Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure
1 (p. 165) or may have node L below the I-J-K plane.

An edge with a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies linearly, rather than parabolically, along that edge. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide
for information about the use of midside nodes.

SOLID92 Product Restrictions


When used in the product(s) listed below, the stated product-specific restrictions apply to this element in
addition to the general assumptions and restrictions given in the previous section.
ANSYS Professional

The DAMP material property is not allowed.

Fluence body loads are not applicable.

The only special feature allowed is stress stiffening.

170

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SOLID95
3-D 20-Node Structural Solid
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Product Restrictions

SOLID95 Element Description


Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a current-technology element such as SOLID186 (KEYOPT(2) = 1, or KEYOPT(2) = 0 for nonlinear analyses).
SOLID95 is a higher-order version of the 3-D 8-node solid element SOLID45. It can tolerate irregular shapes
without as much loss of accuracy. SOLID95 elements have compatible displacement shapes and are well
suited to model curved boundaries.
The element is defined by 20 nodes having three degrees of freedom per node: translations in the nodal x,
y, and z directions. The element may have any spatial orientation. SOLID95 has plasticity, creep, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. Various printout options are also available.

Figure 1 SOLID95 Geometry


M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
A,B

Z
K,L,S

V
N

3
L

S
Z

M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
A
Y B
Z
T
K
L S
R
Q
J
Pyramid Option

I
J

O,P,W

J
Tetrahedral Option
O

N
T

V
Z

A,B
K,L,S

J
Prism Option

SOLID95 Input Data


The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 171). A
prism-shaped element may be formed by defining the same node numbers for nodes K, L, and S; nodes A

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

171

SOLID95
and B; and nodes O, P, and W. A tetrahedral-shaped element and a pyramid-shaped element may also be
formed as shown in Figure 1 (p. 171). A similar, but 10-node tetrahedron, element is SOLID187.
Besides the nodes, the element input data includes the orthotropic material properties. Orthotropic material
directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element coordinate system orientation is
as described in Coordinate Systems.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Pressures may be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 171). Positive pressures act into the element.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults to
TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). If all corner node temperatures are
specified, each midside node temperature defaults to the average temperature of its adjacent corner nodes.
For any other input temperature pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
A lumped mass matrix formulation, which may be useful for certain analyses, may be obtained with LUMPM.
While the consistent matrix gives good results for most applications, the lumped matrix may give better
results with reduced analyses using Guyan reduction. The KEYOPT(5) and (6) parameters provide various
element printout options (see Element Solution).
You cannot set initial state conditions (INISTATE) using this element. You can set initial state conditions
using current-technology elements only (such as LINK180,SHELL181). To continue using initial state conditions
in future releases, consider using a current element technology. For more information, see Legacy vs. Current
Element Technologies in the Element Reference. For more information about setting initial state values, see
the INISTATE command documentation and Initial State Loading in the Basic Analysis Guide.
You can include the effects of pressure load stiffness using SOLCONTROL,,,INCP. If an unsymmetric matrix
is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, use NROPT,UNSYM.
A summary of the element input is given in "SOLID95 Input Summary" (p. 172). A general description of element
input is given in Element Input.

SOLID95 Input Summary


Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z, A, B
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ), PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY,
NUYZ, NUXZ), DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, DAMP
Surface Loads
Pressures -face 1 (J-I-L-K), face 2 (I-J-N-M), face 3 (J-K-O-N),
face 4 (K-L-P-O), face 5 (L-I-M-P), face 6 (M-N-O-P)
Body Loads
Temperatures -T(I), T(J), ..., T(Z), T(A), T(B)

172

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SOLID95
Special Features
Plasticity (BISO, MISO, BKIN, MKIN, KINH, DP, ANISO)
Creep (CREEP, RATE)
Swelling (SWELL)
Elasticity (MELAS)
Other material (USER)
Stress stiffening
Large deflection
Large strain
Birth and death
Adaptive descent
Items in parentheses refer to data tables associated with the TB command.
KEYOPT(5)
Extra element output:
0 -Basic element printout
1 -Repeat basic solution for all integration points
2 -Nodal stress printout
KEYOPT(6)
Extra surface output:
0 -Basic element printout
1 -Surface printout for face I-J-N-M
2 -Surface printout for face I-J-N-M and face K-L-P-O (Surface printout valid for linear materials only)
3 -Nonlinear printout at each integration point
4 -Surface printout for faces with nonzero pressure
KEYOPT(11)
Integration rule:
0 -No reduced integration (default)
1 -2 x 2 x 2 reduced integration option for brick shape
See Failure Criteria in the Theory Reference for the Mechanical APDL and Mechanical Applications for an explanation of the three predefined failure criteria. For a complete discussion of failure criteria, please refer to
Failure Criteria.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

173

SOLID95

SOLID95 Output Data


The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:

Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution

Additional element output as shown in Table 1: SOLID95 Element Output Definitions (p. 174)

Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 174).


The element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. The surface stress outputs are
in the surface coordinate systems and are available for any face (KEYOPT(6)). The coordinate systems for
faces I-J-N-M and K-L-P-O are shown in Figure 2 (p. 174). The other surface coordinate systems follow similar
orientations as indicated by the pressure face node description. Surface printout is valid only if the conditions
described in Element Solution are met. The SXY component is the in-plane shear stress on that face. A
general description of solution output is given in Solution Output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to
view results.

Figure 2 SOLID95 Stress Output


5

P
X
SZ 6

M
y

B
N

U
L

SX
x

x
SY 3

S
Z

Q
Y

K
R
1
J
Surface Coordinate System

X
The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:
A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
(ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R column
indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and - indicates that the item is not available.

Table 1 SOLID95 Element Output Definitions


Name

Definition

EL

Element number and name

CORNER NODES

Nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P

174

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SOLID95
Name

Definition

MAT

Material number

VOLU:

Volume

XC, YC, ZC

Location where results are reported

PRES

Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, L, K; P2 at I, J, N, M; P3
at J, K, O, N; P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P; P6 at
M, N, O, P

TEMP

Temperatures T(I), T(J), ..., T(Z), T(A), T(B)

S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ

Stresses

S:1, 2, 3

Principal stresses

S:INT

Stress intensity

S:EQV

Equivalent stress

EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,


XZ

Elastic strains

EPEL:1, 2, 3

Principal elastic strains

EPEL:EQV

Equivalent elastic strain [4]

EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,


XZ

Average thermal strains

EPTH:EQV

Equivalent thermal strain [4]

EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,


XZ

Average plastic strains

EPPL:EQV

Equivalent plastic strain [4]

EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ,


XZ

Average creep strains

EPCR:EQV

Equivalent creep strain [4]

EPSW:

Swelling strain

NL:EPEQ

Average equivalent plastic strain

NL:SRAT

Ratio of trial stress to stress on yield surface

NL:SEPL

Average equivalent stress from stress-strain curve

NL:HPRES

Hydrostatic pressure

FACE

Face label

AREA

Face area

TEMP

Face average temperature

EPEL(X, Y, XY)

Surface elastic strains

PRES

Surface pressure

S(X, Y, XY)

Surface stresses (X-axis parallel to line defined by


first two nodes which define the face)

S(1, 2, 3)

Surface principal stresses

SINT

Surface stress intensity

SEQV

Surface equivalent stress

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

175

SOLID95
Name

Definition

LOCI:X, Y, Z

O
-

Integration point locations

R
Y

1.

Nonlinear solution (output only if the element has a nonlinear material)

2.

Surface output (if KEYOPT(6) is 1, 2, or 4)

3.

Available only at centroid as a *GET item

4.

The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio: for elastic and thermal this value is set by the
user (MP,PRXY); for plastic and creep this value is set at 0.5.

Table 2 SOLID95 Miscellaneous Element Output


Description

Names of Items Output

Nonlinear Integration Pt. Solution

EPPL, EPEQ, SRAT, SEPL, HPRES, EPCR

Integration Point Stress Solution

TEMP, S, SINT, SEQV, EPEL

Nodal Stress Solution

TEMP, S, SINT, SEQV, EPEL

1.

Output at each integration point, if the element has a nonlinear material and KEYOPT(6) = 3

2.

Output at each integration point, if KEYOPT(5) = 1

3.

Output at each node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2

Table 3: SOLID95 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 176) lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and
The Item and Sequence Number Table in this manual for more information. The following notation is used
in Table 3: SOLID95 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 176):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: SOLID95 Element Output Definitions (p. 174)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
I,J,...,P
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,...,P

Table 3 SOLID95 Item and Sequence Numbers


Output
Quantity
Name

Item

P1

SMISC

P2

SMISC

P3

SMISC

10

12

11

P4

SMISC

13

14

16

15

P5

SMISC

18

17

19

20

P6

SMISC

21

22

23

24

176

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

SOLID95
Output
Quantity
Name

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input


Item

S:1

NMISC

11

16

21

26

31

36

S:2

NMISC

12

17

22

27

32

37

S:3

NMISC

13

18

23

28

33

38

S:INT

NMISC

14

19

24

29

34

39

S:EQV

NMISC

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

Note
N refers to the failure criterion number: N = 1 for the first failure criterion, N = 2 for the second
failure criterion, and so on.
See Surface Solution in this manual for the item and sequence numbers for surface output for the ETABLE
command.

SOLID95 Assumptions and Restrictions

The element must not have a zero volume.

The element may not be twisted such that the element has two separate volumes. This occurs most
frequently when the element is not numbered properly.

Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 171) or may have the planes IJKL and MNOP
interchanged.

An edge with a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies linearly, rather than parabolically, along that edge. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide
for more information on the use of midside nodes.

Degeneration to the form of pyramid should be used with caution. The element sizes, when degenerated,
should be small in order to minimize the stress gradients. Pyramid elements are best used as filler elements or in meshing transition zones.

SOLID95 Product Restrictions


When used in the product(s) listed below, the stated product-specific restrictions apply to this element in
addition to the general assumptions and restrictions given in the previous section.
ANSYS Professional

The DAMP material property is not allowed.

The only special feature allowed is stress stiffening.

KEYOPT(6) = 3 is not applicable.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

177

178

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Legacy Theory
Following is archived theory information for legacy capabilities.

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


Following is archived theory information for legacy elements.

1.1. BEAM4 - 3-D Elastic Beam


x, u

y, v
Y
z, w

X
I

Matrix or Vector

Shape Functions

Integration Points

Stiffness and Mass Matrices

Equation 1215, Equation 1216, Equation 1217, and Equation 1218

None

Stress Stiffness and Damping


Matrices

Equation 127 and Equation 128

None

Pressure Load Vector and


Temperatures

Equation 1215, Equation 1216, and Equation 1217

None

Load Type

Distribution

Element Temperature

Bilinear across cross-section, linear along length

Nodal Temperature

Constant across cross-section, linear along length

Pressure

Linear along length

1.1.1. Stiffness and Mass Matrices


The order of degrees of freedom (DOFs) is shown in Figure 1.1 (p. 182).

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

181

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library

Figure 1.1 Order of Degrees of Freedom

11

12
J

10

6
1 4

The stiffness matrix in element coordinates is (Przemieniecki):


AE L

0
[K ] =
AE L
0

0
0

az
0

ay

0
0

0
c y

cz

0
az

0
a y

0
0

0
cy

0
0

0
c y

GJ L
0

cz

GJ L
0
ey
0
0

Symmetric

ez
c z
0

AE L
0
0

az
0

ay

0
fy

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
cy

fz

c z

GJ L
0
ey
0
0

ez

where:
A = cross-section area (input as AREA on R command)
E = Young's modulus (input as EX on MP command)
L = element length
G = shear modulus (input as GXY on MP command)
J if I = 0
J = torsional moment of inertia = x x

Ix if Ix 0
Ix = input torsional moment of inertia (input as IXX on RMORE command)
Jx = polar moment of inertia = Iy + Iz
182

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

(11)

1.1.1. Stiffness and Mass Matrices


az = a(Iz,y)
ay = a(Iy,z)
bz = b(Iz,y)

fz = f(Iz,y)
fy = f(Iy,z)
a(I, ) =
c(I, ) =

12EI
L3 (1 + )
6EI
2

L (1 + )

e(I, ) =

( 4 + )EI
L(1 + )

f (I, ) =

( 2 )EI
L(1 + )

y =
z =

12EIz
GA sL2
z
12EIy
GA s L2
y

Ii = moment of inertia normal to direction i (input as Iii on R command)


A is = shear area normal to direction i = A / F is
F is = shear coefficient (input as SHEARi on RMORE command)
The consistent mass matrix (LUMPM,OFF) in element coordinates LUMPM,OFF is (Yokoyama):
1 3
0 A
z

0
0
Ay

Symmetric
0
0
Jx 3 A
0
0
0 C y
0
Ey

0 C
0
0
0 Ez
z
[M ] = Mt
0
0
0
0
0 13
1 6
0
Bz
0
0
0
Dz 0
Az

0
0
By
0
Dy 0
0
0
Ay

0
0 Jx 6 A
0
0
0
0
0 Jx 3 A
0
0
0
Dy
0
Fy
0
0
0
Cy
0
Ey

0 Dz 0
0
0
Fz
0 Cz 0
0
0

Ez

(12)

where:

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

183

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


Mt = (A+m)L(1-in)
= density (input as DENS on MP command)
m = added mass per unit length (input as ADDMAS on RMORE command)
in = prestrain (input as ISTRN on RMORE command)
Az = A(rz,y)
Ay = A(ry,z)
Bz = B(rz,y)

Fz = F(rz,y)
Fy = F(ry,z)
13 7
1
6
+
+ 2 + (r L )2
3
5
A(r, ) = 35 10
(1 + )2
9
3
1
6
+
+ 2 (r L )2
6
5
B(r, ) = 70 10
(1 + )2
11

11
1 2 1 1
+
+
+
(r L )2 L

210 120
24
10 2

C(r, ) =
2
(1 + )
13

3
1 2 1 1
+
+

(r L )2 L

420 40
24
10 2

D(r, ) =
(1 + )2
1

1
1 2 2 1
1
+
+
+
+ + 2 (r L )2 L2

105 60
120
3
15 6

E(r, ) =
2
(1 + )
1

1
1 2 1 1
1
+
+
+
+ 2 (r L )2 L2

140 60
120
6
30 6

F(r, ) =
2
(1 + )
ry =
rz =

Iyy
A

= radius of gyration

Izz
= radius of gyration
A

The mass matrix (LUMPM,ON) in element coordinates is:

184

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.1.4. Local to Global Conversion


1
0

0
0

Mt 0
[M ] =
2 0

0
0

0
0

1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
0
0
0
0
0

Symmetric

0 1

0 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0

(13)

1.1.2. Gyroscopic Damping Matrix


The element gyroscopic damping matrix is the same as for PIPE16.

1.1.3. Pressure and Temperature Load Vector


The pressure and temperature load vector are computed in a manner similar to that of BEAM3.

1.1.4. Local to Global Conversion


The element coordinates are related to the global coordinates by:
{u } = [TR ]{u}

(14)

where:
{u } = vector of displacements in element Cartesian coordinates
t
{u} = vector of displacements in global Cartesian coordinates
T
0
[TR ] =
0

0
T
0
0

0
0
T
0

0
0

[T] is defined by:


C1C2
S1C2
S2

( C S S S C ) ( S S S + C C ) S C
[T ] =
1 2 3
1 3
1 2 3
1 3
3 2
( C1S2C3 S1S3 ) ( S1S2C3 C1S3 ) C3C2

(15)

where:
Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

185

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


Y2 Y1

S1 = L xy
0.0

if L xy > d
if L xy < d

Z Z1
S2 = 2
L
S3 = sin ()
X2 X1
if L xy > d

C1 = L xy
1.0
if L xy < d

C2 =

L xy

L
C3 = cos ()
X1, etc. = x coordinate of node 1, etc.
Lxy = projection of length onto X-Y plane
d = .0001 L
= user-selected adjustment angle (input as THETA on R command)
If a third node is given, is not used. Rather C3 and S3 are defined using:
{V1} = vector from origin to node 1
{V2} = vector from origin to node 2
{V3} = vector from origin to node 3
{V4} = unit vector parallel to global Z axis, unless element is almost parallel to Z axis, in which case it is
parallel to the X axis.
Then,
{ V5 } = { V3 } { V1} = vector between nodes I and K

(16)

{ V6 } = { V2 } { V1} = vector along element X axis

(17)

{ V7 } = { V6 } { V4 }

(18)

{ V8 } = { V6 } { V5 }

(19)

and

186

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.1.5. Stress Calculations


C3 =

{ V7 } { V8 }
{ V7 } { V8 }

(110)

S3 =

{ V6 } ({ V9 } { V8 })
{ V6 } { V9 } { V8 }

(111)

The x and refer to vector cross and dot products, respectively. Thus, the element stiffness matrix in global
coordinates becomes:
[K e ] = [TR ]T [K ][TR ]

(112)

[Me ] = [TR ]T [M ][TR ]

(113)

[Se ] = [TR ]T [S ][TR ]

(114)

{Fe } = [TR ]T {F }

(115)

( [S ] is defined in Large Strain).

1.1.5. Stress Calculations


The centroidal stress at end i is:
F
idir = x,i
A

(116)

where:
idir = centroidal stress (output as SDIR)
Fx,i = axial force (output as FX)
The bending stresses are

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

187

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


bnd =
z,i

bnd =
y,i

My,i t z

(117)

2Iy

Mz,i t y

(118)

2Iz

where:
n
bnd = bending stress in element x direction on the element
z,i
+ z side of the beam at end i (output as SBZ)

n
bnd = bending stess on the element in element x direction
y,i
- y side of the beam at end i (output as SBY)

My,i = moment about the element y axis at end i


Mz,i = moment about the element z axis at end i
tz = thickness of beam in element z direction (input as TKZ on R command)
ty = thickness of beam in element y direction (input as TKY on R command)
The maximum and minimum stresses are:
max = idir + bnd + bnd
i
z,i
y,i

(119)

min = idir bnd bnd


i
z,i
y,i

(120)

The presumption has been made that the cross-section is a rectangle, so that the maximum and minimum
stresses of the cross-section occur at the corners. If the cross-section is of some other form, such as an ellipse,
the user must replace Equation 119 (p. 188) and Equation 120 (p. 188) with other more appropriate expressions.
For long members, subjected to distributed loading (such as acceleration or pressure), it is possible that the
peak stresses occur not at one end or the other, but somewhere in between. If this is of concern, the user
should either use more elements or compute the interior stresses outside of the program.

188

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.2.1. Element Matrices

1.2. CONTAC12 - 2-D Point-to-Point Contact

J
n
s

Y or axial

Nodes may be coincident

X or radial

Matrix or Vector
Stiffness Matrix

Shape Functions

Integration Points

None (nodes may be coincident)

Load Type

None

Distribution

Element Temperature

None - average used for material property evaluation

Nodal Temperature

None - average used for material property evaluation

1.2.1. Element Matrices


CONTAC12 may have one of three conditions if the elastic Coulomb friction option (KEYOPT(1) = 0) is used:
closed and stuck, closed and sliding, or open. The following matrices are derived assuming that is input
as 0.0.
1.

Closed and stuck. This occurs if:


Fn > Fs

(121)

where:
= coefficient of friction (input as MU on TB command with Lab = FRIC or MP command)
Fn = normal force across gap
Fs = sliding force parallel to gap
The normal force is:
Fn = kn (un,J un,I )

(122)

where:
kn = normal stiffness (input as KN on R command
un,I = displacement of node I in normal direction
Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

189

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


un,J = displacement of node J in normal direction
input as INTF on R command
= interference
= - d
d = distance between nodes

if KEYOPT(4) = 0
if KEYOPT(4) = 1

The sliding force is:


Fs = k s (us,J us,I uo )

(123)

where:
ks = sticking stiffness (input as KS on R command)
us,I = displacement of node I in sliding direction
us,J = displacement of node J in sliding direction
uo = distance that nodes I and J have slid with respect to each other
The resulting element stiffness matrix (in element coordinates) is:
ks
0
[K ] =
k s

0
kn
0
kn

k s
0
ks
0

0
kn

kn

(124)

and the Newton-Raphson load vector (in element coordinates) is:


Fs
F

nr
{F } = n
Fs
Fn

2.

Closed and sliding. This occurs if:


Fn = Fs

In this case, the element stiffness matrix (in element coordinates) is:

190

(125)

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

(126)

1.2.3. Rigid Coulomb Friction

[K ] =

0
0
0
0

0
kn
0
kn

0
kn

kn

0
0
0
0

(127)

and the Newton-Raphson load vector is the same as in Equation 125 (p. 190). If the unsymmetric option
is chosen (NROPT,UNSYM), then the stiffness matrix includes the coupling between the normal and
sliding directions; which for STAT = 2 is:

[K ] =

3.

0
0
0
0

kn
kn
kn
kn

0
0
0
0

kn
kn

k n

kn

(128)

Open - When there is no contact between nodes I and J. There is no stiffness matrix or load vector.

Figure 1.2 (p. 191) shows the force-deflection relationships for this element. It may be seen in these figures
that the element is nonlinear and therefore needs to be solved iteratively. Further, since energy lost in the
slider cannot be recovered, the load needs to be applied gradually.

Figure 1.2 Force-Deflection Relations for Standard Case

Fn

Fs
m | Fn |
1
(

n)J ( n) I

kn

ks
(

s)J ( s) I

- m | Fn |
For Fn <0, and no
reversed loading

1.2.2. Orientation of the Element


The element is normally oriented based on (input as THETA on R command). If KEYOPT(2) = 1, however,
is not used. Rather, the first iteration has equal to zero, and all subsequent iterations have the orientation
of the element based on the displacements of the previous iteration. In no case does the element use its
nodal coordinates.

1.2.3. Rigid Coulomb Friction


If the user knows that a gap element will be in sliding status for the life of the problem, and that the relative
displacement of the two nodes will be monotonically increasing, the rigid Coulomb friction option (KEYOPT(1)
= 1) can be used to avoid convergence problems. This option removes the stiffness in the sliding direction,
Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

191

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


as shown in Figure 1.3 (p. 192). It should be noted that if the relative displacement does not increase monotonically, the convergence characteristics of KEYOPT(1) = 1 will be worse than for KEYOPT(1) = 0.

Figure 1.3 Force-Deflection Relations for Rigid Coulomb Option

Fn

m | Fn |

Fs

n)J ( n) I

kn

s)J ( s) I

- m | Fn |
For Fn <0, and no
reversed loading

1.3. PIPE16 - Elastic Straight Pipe


x
x,u

y,v
J

z,w

X
Z

Matrix or Vector

Shape Functions

Integration Points

Stiffness and Mass


Matrices

Equation 1215,Equation 1216,Equation 1217,


and Equation 1218

None

Stress Stiffness and


Damping Matrices

Equation 1216 and Equation 1217

None

Pressure and Thermal


Load Vectors

Equation 1215, Equation 1216, and Equation 1217

None

Load Type

Distribution

Element Temperature

Linear thru thickness or across diameter, and along length

Nodal Temperature

Constant across cross-section, linear along length

Pressure

Internal and External: constant along length and around circumference. Lateral: constant along length

192

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.3.2. Stiffness Matrix

1.3.1. Assumptions and Restrictions


The element is assumed to be a thin-walled pipe except as noted. The corrosion allowance is used only in
the stress evaluation, not in the matrix formulation.

1.3.2. Stiffness Matrix


The element stiffness matrix of PIPE16 is similar to that of a 3-D elastic beam, except that
A = Aw =

2
(Do Di2 ) = pipe wall cross-sectional area
4

Iy = Iz = I =

J=

1
4
(Do DI4 )
= bending moment of inertia
64
Cf

4
(Do Di4 ) = torsional moment of inertia
32

(129)

(130)

(131)

and,
A si =

A
= shear area
2 .0

(132)

where:
= 3.141592653
Do = outside diameter (input as OD on R command)
Di = inside diameter = Do - 2tw
tw = wall thickness (input as TKWALL on R command)
1.0
Cf =
f

if f = 0.0
if f > 0.0

f = flexibility factor (input as FLEX on R command)


Further, the axial stiffness of the element is defined as
A wE

if k = 0.0
K (11) = L
,
k
if k > 0.0

(133)

where:
K (11) = axial stiffness of element
,
E = Young's modulus (input as EX on MP command)
L = element length
Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

193

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


k = alternate axial pipe stiffness (input as STIFF on RMORE command)

1.3.3. Mass Matrix


The element mass matrix of PIPE16 is the same as for a 3-D elastic beam, except total mass of the element
is assumed to be:
w
me = me + (fl A fl + in A in )L

(134)

where:
me = total mass of element
w
w A L if mw = 0.0
= pipe wall mass
me =
if m w > 0.0

mw
mw = alternate pipe wall mass (input as MWALL on RMORE command)
= pipe wall density (input as DENS on MP command)
fl = internal fluid density (input as DENSFL on R command)
2
Di
4
in = insulation density (input as DENSIN on RMORE command)
A fl =

2
2
in
(Do + Do ) if A s = 0.0
in 4
A = in in
= insulation cross-sectional area
A t
in
if A s > 0.0
L

Do+ = Do + 2tin
tin = insulation thickness (input as TKIN on RMORE command)
A in = alternate representation of the surface area of the outside of the pipe element (input as AREAIN
s
on RMORE command)
Also, the bending moments of inertia (Equation 130 (p. 193)) are used without the Cf term.

1.3.4. Gyroscopic Damping Matrix


The element gyroscopic damping matrix is:

194

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.3.5. Load Vector


0
0 0

0 g 0

0 0 0
0 h 0

0 0 h
[Ce ] = 2AL
0 0 0

0 0 g

0 g 0
0 0 0

0 h 0
0 0 h

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Antisymmetric

i 0

0 0 0

h 0 0 0

0 h 0 g 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0
j 0 h 0 0 0

j 0 0 0 h 0 i 0

(135)

where:
= rotation frequency about the positive x axis (input as SPIN on RMORE command)
g=

h=

i=

6 / 5r 2
L2 (1 + )2
(1 10 1 2 )r 2
L(1 + )2

( 2 15 + 1 6 + 1 3 2 )r 2

j=

(1 + )2
(1 30 + 1 6 1 6 2 )r 2
(1 + )2

r = I/ A
=

12EI

GA sL2
G = shear modulus (input as GXY on MP command)
As = shear area ( = Aw/2.0)

1.3.5. Load Vector


The element pressure load vector is
F1
F

{F } = 2

F12

(136)

where:
Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

195

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


F1 = FA + FP
F7 = -FA + FP
FA = A w Epr
x
pr = axial strain due to pressure load, defined below
x
0. 0

Fp = P LC A
1

if KEYOPT(5) = 0
if KEYOPT(5) = 1

P LCA
F2 = F8 = 2
2
P LCA
F3 = F9 = 3
2
F4 = F10 = 0.0
P L2CA
F5 = F11 = 3
12
P L2C A
F6 = F12 = 2
12
P1 = parallel pressure component in element coordinate system (force/unit length)
P2, P3 = transverse pressure components in element coordinate system (force/unit length)

1.0

CA =
positive sine of the angle between
the axis of the element and the
e

direction of the pressures, as


defined by P , P and P
1 2
3

if KEYOPT(5) = 0

if KEYOPT(5) = 1

The transverse pressures are assumed to act on the centerline, and not on the inner or outer surfaces. The
transverse pressures in the element coordinate system are computed by
P1
PX


P2 = [T ] PY
P
P
3
Z

(137)

where:
[T] = conversion matrix
PX = transverse pressure acting in global Cartesian X direction) (input using face 2 on SFE command)
PY = transverse pressure acting in global Cartesian Y direction) (input using face 3 on SFE command)

196

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.3.6. Stress Calculation


PZ = transverse pressure acting in global Cartesian Z direction) (input using face 4 on SFE command)
pr , the unrestrained axial strain caused by internal and external pressure effects, is needed to compute the
x
pressure part of the element load vector (see Figure 1.4 (p. 197)).

Figure 1.4 Thermal and Pressure Effects

T90

T180

Tout

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
avg
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
in
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
int
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

T
I

out

pr is computed using thick wall (Lame') effects:


x
pr =
x

PD2 P D2
1
o o
( f E 2 ) i i
D2 D2
E
o
i

(138)

where:
if KEYOPT(8) = 0
1.0
fE =
if KEYOPT(8) = 1
0.0
= Poisson's ratio (input as PRXY or NUXY on MP command)
Pi = internal pressure (input using face 1 on SFE command)
Po = external pressure (input using face 5 on SFE command)

An element thermal load vector is computed also, based on thick wall effects.

1.3.6. Stress Calculation


The output stresses, computed at the outside surface and illustrated in Figure 1.5 (p. 199) and Figure 1.6 (p. 199),
are calculated from the following definitions:

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

197

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


F + FE
dir = x
aw

bend = C

tor =

h =

f =

(139)

Mbro
Ir

(140)

Mxro
J

(141)

2
2PDi2 Po (Do + Di2 )
i
2
Do Di2

(142)

2Fs

(143)

Aw

where:
dir = direct stress (output as SDIR)
Fx = axial force

2
2
(PDi PoDo )
i
FE = 4
0.0

if KEYOPT(8) = 0
if KEYOPT(8) = 1

2
(do Di2 )
4
do = 2 ro
aw =

D
ro = o t c
2
tc = corrosion allowance (input as TKCORR on RMORE command)
bend = bending stress (output as SBEND)
C = stress intensification factor, defined in Table 1.1: Stress Intensification Factors (p. 199)
Mb = bending moment = M2 + M2
y
z
4
(do Di4 )
64
tor = torsional shear stress (output as ST)
Mx = torsional moment
J = 2Ir
h = hoop pressure stress at the outside surface of the pipe (output as SH)
Ir =

D
Ri = i
2
198

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.3.6. Stress Calculation


te = tw - tc
f = lateral force shear stress (output as SSF)
2
2
Fs = shear force = Fy + Fz

Average values of Pi and Po are reported as first and fifth items of the output quantities ELEMENT PRESSURES.
The outside surface is chosen as the bending stresses usually dominate over pressure induced stresses.

Figure 1.5 Elastic Pipe Direct Stress Output

bend
J

dir
Figure 1.6 Elastic Pipe Shear Stress Output

Mx
dir , bend

tor

F
s
Stress intensification factors are given in Table 1.1: Stress Intensification Factors (p. 199).

Table 1.1 Stress Intensification Factors


KEYOPT(2)

C
at node I

at node J

C,I

C,J

C,T

1.0

1.0

C,T

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

199

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


3

C,T

C,T

Any entry in Table 1.1: Stress Intensification Factors (p. 199) either input as or computed to be less than 1.0 is
set to 1.0. The entries are:
C,I

= stress intensification factor of end I of straight pipe (input as SIFI on R command)

C,J

= stress intensification factor of end J of straight pipe (input as SIFJ on R command)


0.9
CT =
= "T" stess intensification factor (ASME(40))
23
4t w

(Di + do )

th (output as STH), which is in the postprocessing file, represents the stress due to the thermal gradient
thru the thickness. If the temperatures are given as nodal temperatures, th = 0.0. But, if the temperatures
are input as element temperatures,
th =

E( To Ta )
1

(144)

where:
To = temperature at outside surface
Ta = temperature midway thru wall
Equation 144 (p. 200) is derived as a special case of Equation 28, Equation 29 and Equation 211 with y as
the hoop coordinate (h) and z as the radial coordinate (r). Specifically, these equations
1.

are specialized to an isotropic material

2.

are premultiplied by [D] and -1

3.

have all motions set to zero, hence x = h = r = xh = hr = xr = 0.0

4.

have r = hr = xr = 0.0 since r = Ro is a free surface.

This results in:


E

t 1 2
x E
t
h =
2
t 1
xh 0

E
1
E

1 2
0

0
T

0 T
0

or

200

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

(145)

1.3.6. Stress Calculation


E T
t
t = h =
= th
x
1

(146)

and
t = 0
xh

(147)

Finally, the axial and shear stresses are combined with:


x = dir + Abend + th

(148)

xh = tor + Bf

(149)

where:
A, B = sine and cosine functions at the appropriate angle
x = axial stress on outside surface (output as SAXL)
xh = hoop stress on outside surface (output as SXH)
The maximum and minimum principal stresses, as well as the stress intensity and the equivalent stress, are
based on the stresses at two extreme points on opposite sides of the bending axis, as shown in Figure
1.7 (p. 202). If shear stresses due to lateral forces f are greater than the bending stresses, the two points
of maximum shearing stresses due to those forces are reported instead. The stresses are calculated from the
typical Mohr's circle approach in Figure 1.8 (p. 202).
The equivalent stress for Point 1 is based on the three principal stresses which are designated by small circles
in Figure 1.8 (p. 202). Note that one of the small circles is at the origin. This represents the radial stress on
the outside of the pipe, which is equal to zero (unless Po 0.0). Similarly, the points marked with an X
represent the principal stresses associated with Point 2, and a second equivalent stress is derived from them.
Next, the program selects the largest of the four maximum principal stresses (1, output as S1MX), the
smallest of the four minimum principal stresses (3, output as S3MN), the largest of the four stress intensities
(I, output as SINTMX), and the largest of the four equivalent stresses (e, output as SEQVMX). Finally, these
are also compared (and replaced as necessary) to the values at the right positions around the circumference
at each end. These four values are then printed out and put on the postprocessing file.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

201

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library

Figure 1.7 Stress Point Locations


z

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Point 2
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1
Point
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Figure 1.8 Mohr Circles

For point 2

For point 1

xh

xh

Three additional items are put on the postdata file for use with certain code checking. These are:

202

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.4. PIPE18 - Elastic Curved Pipe


c
pr =

P iDo
4t w

(150)

c
MI = M2 + M2 + M2
XI
YI
ZI

Do
2I

c
MJ = M2 + M2 + M2
XJ
YJ
ZJ

(151)

Do
2I

(152)

where:
c
pr = special hoop stress (output as SPR2)
c
MI = special bending stress at end I (output as SMI)
c
MJ = special bending stress at end J (output as SMJ)

MXI = moment about the x axis at node I, etc.

1.4. PIPE18 - Elastic Curved Pipe


J

Matrix or Vector

Shape Functions

Integration Points

Stiffness Matrix

No shape functions are explicitly used. Rather a


flexibility matrix similar to that developed by Chen
is inverted and used.

None

Mass Matrix

No shape functions are used. Rather a lumped


mass matrix using only translational degrees of
freedom is used.

None

Thermal and Pressure


Load Vector

Equation 1215, Equation 1216, and Equation 1217

None

Load Type

Distribution

Element Temperature

Linear thru thickness or across diameter, and along length

Nodal Temperature

Constant across cross-section, linear along length

Pressure

Internal and External: constant along length and around the circumference Lateral: varies trigonometrically along length (see below)
Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

203

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library

1.4.1. Other Applicable Sections


PIPE16 - Elastic Straight Pipe (p. 192) covers some of the applicable stress calculations.

1.4.2. Stiffness Matrix


The geometry in the plane of the element is given in Figure 1.9 (p. 204).

Figure 1.9 Plane Element

The stiffness matrix is developed based on an approach similar to that of Chen. The flexibility of one end
with respect to the other is:
f11 0

0 f22
f
0
[ f ] = 31
0 f42
f51 0

0 f62

f13
0
f33
0
f53
0

0
f24
0
f44
0
f64

f15
0
f35
0
f55
0

f26
0

f46
0

f66

where:
R3Cfi
3
R

( cos + sin )
2 cos 2 sin + +
EI
2EA w
2R(1 + )
+
( cos sin )
EA w

f11 =

f13 = f31 =
f15 = f51 =

204

R3Cfi
EI

R sin 5

+ 2
cos 1 + 2 sin +
w 2

EA

R2Cfi
(sin )
EI

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

(153)

1.4.2. Stiffness Matrix

f22 =
+
+

R3 (1 + )
( sin)
EI
R3
(1 + + Cfo )( cos sin)
2EI
R( 4(1 + ))
EA w

f24 = f42 =

R2
(1 + + Cfo )( cos sin )
2EI

f26 = f62 =

R2
EI

(1 + )(cos( 1)) + 2 sin (1 + + Cfo )

1
R

R3Cfi
f33 = cos sin
+
EI
2
2

EA w

4R(1 + )
+ cos + sin

2
2
EA w
f35 = f53 =
f44 =

R2Cfi
(cos 1)
EI

R
R
(1 + + Cfo ) cos +
(1 + Cfo )sin
2EI
2EI

f46 = f64 =

R
(1 + + Cfo ) sin
2EI

f55 =

RCfi

EI

f66 =

R
((1 + + Cfo ) cos (1 + Cfo ) sin )
2EI

and where:
R = radius of curvature (input as RADCUR on R command) (see Figure 1.9 (p. 204))
= included angle of element (see Figure 1.9 (p. 204))
E = Young's modulus (input as EX on MP command)
= Poisson's ratio (input as PRXY or NUXY on MP command)

4
I = moment of inertia ofcross-section =
(Do Di4 )
64
2
(Do Di2 )
4
Do = outside diameter (input as OD on R command)
Di = Do - 2t = inside diameter
t = wall thickness (input as TKWALL on R command)
A w = area of cross-section =

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

205

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


C
fi

1.65 or 1.0,
h

Cfi =
1.65

or 1.0
PrXK
h 1 +
tE

10 + 12h2

1 + 12h2

if C > 0.0
fi

whichever is greater if

C = 0.0 and KEYOPT(3) = 0


fi
(ASME flexibility factor, ASME Code(40))
o
whichever is greater if

C i = 0.0 and KEYOPT(3) = 1


f
(ASME flexibility factor, ASME Code(40))
if C = 0.0 and KEYOPT(3) = 2
fi
(Karman flexibility factor)

Cfi = in-plane flexibility (input as FLXI on R command)


h=

tR
r2

r = average radius
P P
P= 1 o
0.0

(Do t )
2

if Pi Po > 0.0
if Pi Po 0.0

Pi = internal pressure (input on SFE command)


Po = external pressure (input on SFE command)
4
1

r 3 R 3
6
XK = t r

0 .0

C
C = fo
fo
Cfi

R
1 .7
r
R
if < 1.7
r
if

if C > 0.0
fo
if C = 0.0
fo

C = out-of-plane flexibility (output as FLXO on RMORE com m and)


fo
The user should not use the KEYOPT(3) = 1 option if:
cR < 2r

(154)

where:
c = included angle of the complete elbow, not just the included angle for this element ()
Next, the 6 x 6 stiffness matrix is derived from the flexibility matrix by inversion:

206

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.4.4. Load Vector


[K o ] = [ f ]1

(155)

The full 12 x 12 stiffness matrix (in element coordinates) is derived by expanding the 6 x 6 matrix derived
above and transforming to the global coordinate system.

1.4.3. Mass Matrix


The element mass matrix is a diagonal (lumped) matrix with each translation term being defined as:
mt =

me
2

(156)

where:
mt = mass at each node in each translation direction
me= (Aw + flAfl + inAin)R = total mass of element
= pipe wall density (input as DENS on MP command)
fl = internal fluid density (input as DENSFL on RMORE command)
2
Di
4
in = insulation density (input as DENSIN on RMORE command)
A fl =

A in =

2
2
(Do + Do ) = insulation cross-section area
4

Do+ = Do + 2 tin
tin = insulation thickness (input as TKIN on RMORE command)

1.4.4. Load Vector


The load vector in element coordinates due to thermal and pressure effects is:
pr
pr
th
{F } + {F ,i } = R x [K e ]{ A } + {F ,t }

(157)

where:
x = strain caused by thermal as well as internal and external pressure effects (see Equation 138 (p. 197)
)
[Ke] = element stiffness matrix in global coordinates
{ A } = 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

pr
{F ,t } = element load vector due to transverse pressure
pr
{F ,t }

is computed based on the transverse pressures acting in the global Cartesian directions (input using
face 2, 3, and 4 on SFE command) and curved beam formulas from Roark. Table 18, reference no. (loading)

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

207

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


3, 4, and 5 and 5c was used for in-plane effects and Table 19, reference no. (end restraint) 4e was used for
out-of-plane effects. As a radial load varying trigonometrically along the length of the element was not one
of the available cases given in Roark, an integration of a point radial load was done, using Loading 5c.

1.4.5. Stress Calculations


In the stress pass, the stress evaluation is similar to that for PIPE16 - Elastic Straight Pipe (p. 192). The wall
thickness is diminished by the corrosion allowance, if present. The bending stress components are multiplied
by stress intensification factors (C). The intensified stresses are used in the principal and combined stress
calculations. The factors are:
Co
, if SIFI < 1.0

C,I = stress intensification factor at end


, if SIFI > 1.0
I (input as SIFI on R command)

(158)

Co
, if SIFJ < 1.0

C,J = stress intensification factor at end


J (input as SIFJ on R command) , if SIFJ > 1.0

(159)

0.9

Co = h2 3
e
1.0

(160)

whichever is greater (ASME Code(40))

where:
he =

16t eR
(Di + do )2

te = t - tc
do = Do - 2 tc (where tc = corrosion allowances, input as TKCORR on the R command)

1.5. PLANE42 - 2-D Structural Solid


K

Y,v
L

X,R,u
I

208

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.6. SOLID45 - 3-D Structural Solid


Matrix or Vector

Geometry

Shape Functions

Integration Points

Quad

Equation 12117 and Equation 12118 and, if modified extra


shapes are included (KEYOPT(2)
1) and element has 4 unique
nodes, Equation 12129 and
Equation 12130

2x2

Triangle

Equation 1298 and Equation 1299

Quad

Equation 12117 and Equation 12118

Triangle

Equation 1298 and Equation 1299

Stiffness Matrix

Mass and Stress Stiffness


Matrices
Pressure Load Vector

3 if axisymmetric
1 if plane

Same as stiffness
matrix

Same as mass matrix, specialized to face

Load Type

Distribution

Element Temperature

Bilinear across element, constant thru thickness or around circumference

Nodal Temperature

Same as element temperature distribution

Pressure

Linear along each face

References: Wilson, Taylor

1.5.1. Other Applicable Sections


"Structures" describes the derivation of structural element matrices and load vectors as well as stress evaluations.

1.6. SOLID45 - 3-D Structural Solid


r
P
t

O
M

Z,w

s
L

Y,v

I
X,u

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

209

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


Matrix or Vector

Shape Functions

Integration Points

Stiffness Matrix and


Thermal Load Vector

Equation 12215, Equation 12216, and


Equation 12217 or, if modified extra
shape functions are included (KEYOPT(1)
= 0) and element has 8 unique nodes,
Equation 12230, Equation 12231, and
Equation 12232

Mass and Stress Stiffness


Matrices

Equation 12215, Equation 12216, and


Equation 12217

2 x 2 x 2 if KEYOPT(2) = 0
1 if KEYOPT(2) = 1

Same as stiffness matrix

Quad

Equation 1268 and Equation 1269

2x2

Triangle

Equation 1249 and Equation 1250

Pressure Load Vector

Load Type

Distribution

Element Temperature

Trilinear thru element

Nodal Temperature

Trilinear thru element

Pressure

Bilinear across each face

Reference: Wilson, Taylor et al.

1.6.1. Other Applicable Sections


"Structures" describes the derivation of structural element matrices and load vectors as well as stress evaluations. Uniform reduced integration technique (Flanagan and Belytschko) can be chosen by using KEYOPT(2)
= 1.

1.7. CONTAC52 - 3-D Point-to-Point Contact


J

Y
z

x
y

X
I

Matrix or Vector
Stiffness Matrix
Load Type
Element Temperature
210

Geometry

Shape Functions

Integration Points

Normal Direction

None

None

Sliding Direction

None

None

Distribution
None - average used for material property evaluation
Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.7.2. Element Matrices


Load Type

Distribution

Nodal Temperature

None - average used for material property evaluation

1.7.1. Other Applicable Sections


CONTAC12 - 2-D Point-to-Point Contact (p. 189) has many aspects also valid for CONTAC52, including normal
and sliding force determinations, rigid Coulomb friction (KEYOPT(1) = 1), and the force-deflection relationship
shown in Figure 1.2 (p. 191).

1.7.2. Element Matrices


CONTAC52 may have one of three conditions: closed and stuck, closed and sliding, or open.
If the element is closed and stuck, the element stiffness matrix (in element coordinates) is:
kn
0

0
[K ] =
kn
0

0
ks
0
0
k s
0

0
0
ks
0
0
k s

kn
0
0
kn
0
0

0
k s
0
0
ks
0

0
0

k s

0
0

ks

(161)

where:
kn = normal stiffness (input as KN on R command)
ks = sticking stiffness (input as KS on R command)
The Newton-Raphson load vector is:
Fn
F
sy
F

nr
{F } = sz
Fn

Fsy

Fsz

(162)

where:
Fn = normal force across gap (from previous iteration)
Fs = sticking force across gap (from previous iteration)
If the element is closed and sliding in both directions, the element stiffness matrix (in element coordinates)
is:

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

211

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


kn
0

0
[K ] =
kn
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0 kn
0 0
0 0
0 kn
0 0
0 0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0

0
0

(163)

and the Newton-Raphson load vector is the same as in Equation 162 (p. 211). For details on the unsymmetric
option (NROPT,UNSYM), see CONTAC12 - 2-D Point-to-Point Contact (p. 189)
If the element is open, there is no stiffness matrix or load vector.

1.7.3. Orientation of Element


For both small and large deformation analysis, the orientation of the element is unchanged. The element is
oriented so that the normal force is in line with the original position of the two nodes.

1.8. PIPE59 - Immersed Pipe or Cable


Z
Y

y,v
x,u
z,w

J
I

Matrix or Vector

Options

Shape Functions

Stiffness Matrix; and


Thermal, Pressure, and
Hydrostatic Load Vectors

Pipe Option (KEYOPT(1)


1)

Equation 1215, Equation 1216, Equation 1217, and Equation 1218

None

Cable Option (KEYOPT(1)


= 1)

Equation 126, Equation 127, and Equation 128

None

Pipe Option (KEYOPT(1)


1)

Equation 1216 and


Equation 1217

None

Stress Stiffness Matrix

212

Integration
Points

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.8.2. Location of the Element


Matrix or Vector

Options
Cable Option (KEYOPT(1)
= 1)

None

Equation 1215, Equation 1217, and Equation 1216

None

Cable Option (KEYOPT(1)


= 1) or reduced mass
matrix (KEYOPT(2) = 1)
Hydrodynamic Load Vector

Equation 127 and Equation 128

Pipe Option (KEYOPT(1)


1) with consistent mass
matrix (KEYOPT(2) = 0)

Mass Matrix

Shape Functions

Integration
Points

Equation 126, Equation 127, and Equation 128

None

Same as stiffness matrix

Load Type

Distribution

Element Temperature*

Linear thru thickness or across diameter, and along length

Nodal Temperature*

Constant across cross-section, linear along length

Pressure

Linearly varying (in Z direction) internal and external pressure caused


by hydrostatic effects. Exponentially varying external overpressure
(in Z direction) caused by hydrodynamic effects

Note
* Immersed elements with no internal diameter assume the temperatures of the water.

1.8.1. Overview of the Element


PIPE59 is similar to PIPE16. The principal differences are that the mass matrix includes the:
1.

Outside mass of the fluid (added mass) (acts only normal to the axis of the element),

2.

Internal structural components (pipe option only), and the load vector includes:
a.

Hydrostatic effects

b.

Hydrodynamic effects

1.8.2. Location of the Element


The origin for any problem containing PIPE59 must be at the free surface (mean sea level). Further, the Z
axis is always the vertical axis, pointing away from the center of the earth.
The element may be located in the fluid, above the fluid, or in both regimes simultaneously. There is a tolDe
erance of only 8 below the mud line, for which
De = Do + 2ti

(164)

where:

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

213

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


ti = thickness of external insulation (input as TKIN on RMORE command)
Do = outside diameter of pipe/cable (input as DO on R command)
The mud line is located at distance d below the origin (input as DEPTH with TB,WATER (water motion table)).
This condition is checked with:
D

Z(N) > d + e no error message


8

(165)

Z(N) d + e fatal error message


8

(166)

where Z(N) is the vertical location of node N. If it is desired to generate a structure below the mud line, one
can set up a second material property for those elements using a greater d and deleting hydrodynamic effects.
Alternatively, a second element type such as PIPE288 can be used.
If the problem is a large deflection problem, greater tolerances apply for second and subsequent iterations:
Z(N) > ( d + 10De ) no error message

(167)

( d + 10De ) Z(N) > ( 2d) warning message

(168)

( 2d) Z(N) fatal error message

(169)

where Z(N) is the present vertical location of node N. In other words, the element is allowed to sink into the
mud for 10 diameters before generating a warning message. If a node sinks into the mud a distance equal
to the water depth, the run is terminated. If the element is supposed to lie on the ocean floor, gap elements
must be provided.

1.8.3. Stiffness Matrix


The element stiffness matrix for the pipe option (KEYOPT(1) 1) is the same as for a 3-D elastic beam, except
that:
[K ]( 4,1) = [K ](1, 4 ) = [K ](10, 7 ) = [K ](7,10 ) = TT and [K ](7, 4 ) = [K ]( 4, 7) = [K ](10, 1) = [K ](1,10 ) = TT

where:

TT =
3
3
GT (Do Di )

214

if KEYOPT(1) = 0, 1

(standard option for torque


balanced cable or pipe)

if KEYOPT(1) = 2

(twist tention option for non-torque


balanced cable or pipe)

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.8.5. Load Vector


GT = twist-tension stiffness constant, which is a function of the helical winding of the armoring (input
as TWISTEN on RMORE command, may be negative)
Di = inside diameter of pipe = Do - 2 tw
tw = wall thickness (input as TWALL on R command)
L = element length
2
A = (Do D2 ) = cross-sectional area
i
4

4
(Do Di4 ) = moment of inertia
64
J = 2I
I=

1.8.4. Mass Matrix


The element mass matrix for the pipe option (KEYOPT(1) 1) and KEYOPT(2) = 0) is the same as for a 3-D
elastic beam, except that [M ] (1,1), [M ] (7,7), [M ] (1,7), and [M ] (7,1), as well as M(4,4), M(10,10), M(4,10),
and M(10,4), are multiplied by the factor (Ma /Mt).
where:
Mt = (mw + mint + mins + madd) L = mass/unit length for motion normal to axis of element
Ma = (mw + mint + mins) L= mass/unit length for motion parallel to axis of element
2
m w = (1 in ) (DoDi2 )
4
= density of the pipe wall (input as DENS on MP command)
in = initial strain (input as ISTR on RMORE command)
mint = mass/unit length of the internal fluid and additional hardware (input as CENMPL on RMORE
command)
2
2
min s = (1 in )i (De Do )
4
i = density of external insulation (input as DENSIN on RMORE command)
2
De
4
CI = coefficient of added mass of the external fluid (input as CI on RMORE command)
w = fluid density (input as DENSW with TB,WATER)
madd = (1 in )CI w

1.8.5. Load Vector


The element load vector consists of two parts:
1.

Distributed force per unit length to account for hydrostatic (buoyancy) effects ({F/L}b) as well as axial
nodal forces due to internal pressure and temperature effects {Fx}.

2.

Distributed force per unit length to account for hydrodynamic effects (current and waves) ({F/L}d).

The hydrostatic and hydrodynamic effects work with the original diameter and length, i.e., initial strain and
large deflection effects are not considered.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

215

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library

1.8.6. Hydrostatic Effects


Hydrostatic effects may affect the outside and the inside of the pipe. Pressure on the outside crushes the
pipe and buoyant forces on the outside tend to raise the pipe to the water surface. Pressure on the inside
tends to stabilize the pipe cross-section.
The buoyant force for a totally submerged element acting in the positive z direction is:
{F / L}b = Cb w

2
De {g}
4

(170)

where: {F/L}b = vector of loads per unit length due to buoyancy


Cb = coefficient of buoyancy (input as CB on RMORE command)
{g} = acceleration vector
Also, an adjustment for the added mass term is made.
The crushing pressure at a node is:
s
a
Po = w gz + Po

(171)

where:
s
Po = crushing pressure due to hydrostatic effects
g = acceleration due to gravity
z = vertical coordinate of the node
a
Po = input external pressure (input on SFE command)

The internal (bursting) pressure is:


Pi = o g( z Sfo ) + Pia

(172)

where:
Pi = internal pressure
o = internal fluid density (input as DENSO on R command)
Sfo = z coordinate of free surface of fluid (input as FSO on R command)
Pa
i

= input internal pressure (input as SFE command)

To ensure that the problem is physically possible as input, a check is made at the element midpoint to see
if the cross-section collapses under the hydrostatic effects. The cross-section is assumed to be unstable if:

216

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.8.6. Hydrostatic Effects

s
Po

2t w
P i>
2 D
4(1 ) o
E

(173)

where:
E = Young's modulus (input as EX on MP command)
= Poisson's ratio (input as PRXY or NUXY on MP command)
The axial force correction term (Fx) is computed as
Fx = AE x

(174)

where x, the axial strain (see Equation 212) is:


x = T +

1
( x ( h + r ))
E

(175)

where:
= coefficient of thermal expansion (input as ALPX on MP command)
T = Ta - TREF
Ta = average element temperature
TREF = reference temperature (input on TREF command)
x = axial stress, computed below
h = hoop stress, computed below
r = radial stress, computed below
The axial stress is:
P D 2 P D2
i
i 2 o2 o
x = Do D i

0.0

if KEYOPT(8) = 0

(176)
if KEYOPT(8) = 1

and using the Lam stress distribution,

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

217

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library

2
P iD i2 PoDo +

D2
2
Do D i2

h =

r =

2
D i2Do

2
P iD i2 PoDo

2
D i2Do

D2
2
Do D i2

(P i Po )

(P i Po )

(177)

(178)

where:
s
d
Po = Po + Po
d
Po = hydrodynamic pressure, described below
D = diameter being studied

Pi and Po are taken as average values along each element. Combining Equation 175 (p. 217) thru Equation 178 (p. 218).
2
f 2 P iD i2 PoDo
x = T + E
2
E
Do D i2

(179)

Note:
1.0
fE =
0.0

if KEYOPT(8) = 0
if KEYOPT(8) = 1

Note that if the cross-section is solid (Di = 0.), Equation 177 (p. 218) reduces to:
x = T

f E 2
E

Po

(180)

1.8.7. Hydrodynamic Effects


See Hydrodynamic Loads on Line Elements in the Element Tools section of this document for information
about this subject.

1.8.8. Stress Output


The below two equations are specialized either to end I or to end J.
The stress output for the pipe format (KEYOPT(1) 1), is similar to PIPE16. The average axial stress is:

218

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.8.8. Stress Output


F +F
x = n E
A

(181)

where:
x = average axial stress (output as SAXL)
Fn = axial element reaction force (output as FX, adjusted for sign)

2
2
(PD PoDo ) if KEYOPT(8) = 0
FE = 4 i i
0.0
if KEYOPT(8) = 1

Pi = internal pressure (output as the first term of ELEMENT PRESSURES)


s
d
Po = external pressure = Po + Po (output as the fifth term of the ELEMENT PRESSURES)

and the hoop stress is:


h =

2
2P iD i2 Po (Do + D i2 )
2
Do D i2

(182)

where:
h = hoop stress at the outside surface of the pipe (output as SH)
Equation 182 (p. 219) is a specialization of Equation 177 (p. 218). The outside surface is chosen as the bending
stresses usually dominate over pressure induced stresses.
All stress results are given at the nodes of the element. However, the hydrodynamic pressure had been
computed only at the two integration points. These two values are then used to compute hydrodynamic
pressures at the two nodes of the element by extrapolation.
For the stress output for the cable format (KEYOPT(1) = 1 with Di = 0.0), the stress is given with and without
the external pressure applied:
F
xI = + P
A

(183)

F
eI =
A

(184)

Fa = A xI

(185)

where:
xI = axial stress (output as SAXL)

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

219

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


P
PE = o
0.0

if KEYOPT(8) = 0
if KEYOPT(8) = 1

eI = equivalent stress (output as SEQV)


{F } = axial force on node (output as FX)
Fa = axial force in the element (output as FAXL)

1.9. SHELL63 - Elastic Shell


t
K

t
L
Y

x,u

y,v
J
X
Z

z,w

Matrix or Vector

Shape Functions

Integration Points

Membrane / Quad

Equation 1292 and Equation 1293 (and, if modified


extra shape functions are
included (KEYOPT(3) = 0)
and element has 4 unique
nodes, Equation 1295,
Equation 1296, and Equation 1297

2x2

Membrane / Triangle

Equation 1265, Equation 1266, and Equation 1267

Bending

Four triangles that are


overlaid are used.These
subtriangles refer to Equation 1267

Membrane / Quad

Equation 1268, Equation 1269, and Equation 1270

2x2

Membrane / Triangle

Equation 1249, Equation 1250, and Equation 1251

Bending

Four triangles that are


overlaid are used.These triangles connect nodes IJK,

Stiffness Matrix and


Thermal Load Vector

Mass, Foundation Stiffness and Stress Stiffness


Matrices

220

3 (for each triangle)

3 (for each triangle)

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.9.2. Foundation Stiffness


Matrix or Vector

Shape Functions

Integration Points

IJL, KLI, and KLJ. w is


defined as given in Zienkiewicz()
One-sixth (one- third for
triangles) of the total pressure times the area is applied to each node normal
of each subtriangle of the
element

Consistent shell
pressure loading
(KEYOPT(6) = 2)
(Load vector includes moments)

Same as mass matrix

Quad

Equation 1268 and Equation 1269 specialized to


the edge

Triangle

Transverse Pressure Load


Vector

Reduced shell
pressure loading
(KEYOPT(6) = 0)
(Load vector excludes moments)

Equation 1249 and Equation 1250 specialized to


the edge

Edge Pressure Load Vector

Load Type

None

Same as mass matrix

Distribution

Element Temperature

Bilinear in plane of element, linear thru thickness

Nodal Temperature

Bilinear in plane of element, constant thru thickness

Pressure

Bilinear in plane of element, linear along each edge

1.9.1. Other Applicable Sections


"Structures" describes the derivation of structural element matrices and load vectors as well as stress evaluations.

1.9.2. Foundation Stiffness


If Kf, the foundation stiffness, is input, the out-of-plane stiffness matrix is augmented by three or four springs
to ground. The number of springs is equal to the number of distinct nodes, and their direction is normal to
the plane of the element. The value of each spring is:
K f ,i =

K f
Nd

(186)

where:
Kf,i = normal stiffness at node i
= element area
Kf = foundation stiffness (input as EFS on R command)
Nd = number of distinct nodes
Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

221

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


The output includes the foundation pressure, computed as:
p =

Kf
( wI + w J + w K + w L )
4

(187)

where:
p = foundation pressure (output as FOUND, PRESS)
wI, etc. = lateral deflection at node I, etc.

1.9.3. In-Plane Rotational Stiffness


The in-plane rotational (drilling) DOF has no stiffness associated with it, based on the shape functions. A
small stiffness is added to prevent a numerical instability following the approach presented by KanokNukulchaifor nonwarped elements if KEYOPT(1) = 0. KEYOPT(3) = 2 is used to include the Allman-type rotational DOFs.

1.9.4. Warping
If all four nodes are not defined to be in the same flat plane (or if an initially flat element loses its flatness
due to large displacements (using NLGEOM,ON)), additional calculations are performed in SHELL63. The
purpose of the additional calculations is to convert the matrices and load vectors of the element from the
points on the flat plane in which the element is derived to the actual nodes. Physically, this may be thought
of as adding short rigid offsets between the flat plane of the element and the actual nodes. (For the membrane
stiffness only case (KEYOPT(1) = 1), the limits given with SHELL41 are used). When these offsets are required,
it implies that the element is not flat, but rather it is warped To account for the warping, the following
.
procedure is used: First, the normal to element is computed by taking the vector cross-product (the common
normal) between the vector from node I to node K and the vector from node J to node L. Then, the check
can be made to see if extra calculations are needed to account for warped elements. This check consists of
comparing the normal to each of the four element corners with the element normal as defined above. The
corner normals are computed by taking the vector cross-product of vectors representing the two adjacent
edges. All vectors are normalized to 1.0. If any of the three global Cartesian components of each corner
normal differs from the equivalent component of the element normal by more than .00001, then the element
is considered to be warped.
A warping factor is computed as:
D
t

(188)

where:
D = component of the vector from the first node to the fourth node parallel to the element normal
t = average thickness of the element
If:
0.1 no warning message is printed
.10 1.0 a warning message is printed
1.0 < a message suggesting the use of triangles is printed and the run terminates

222

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.9.5. Options for Non-Uniform Material


To account for the warping, the following matrix is developed to adjust the output matrices and load vector:
[0 ]
[0 ]
[ w1] [0]
[ 0 ] [ w ] [0 ]
[0 ]
2

[W ] =
[ 0]
[0 ] [ w 3 ] [0 ]

[0 ]
[0 ] [ w 4 ]
[ 0]

[wi ] =

Zio

Zio

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

1
0
0
0

0
1
0
0

0
0
1
0

(189)

0
0

(190)

where:
Z io = offset from average plane at node i
and the DOF are in the usual order of UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ. To ensure the location of the average plane goes through the middle of the element, the following condition is met:
0
Z1 + Z0 + Zo + Zo = 0
4
2
3

(191)

1.9.5. Options for Non-Uniform Material


SHELL63 can be adjusted for nonuniform materials, using an approach similar to that of Takemoto and Cook
. Considering effects in the element x direction only, the loads are related to the displacement by:
Tx = tE x x

Mx =

(192)
t3E x

Ey
12 1 2
xy

Ex

(193)

where:
Tx = force per unit length
t = thickness (input as TK(I), TK(J), TK(K), TK(L) on R command)
Ex = Young's modulus in x direction (input as EX on MP command)
Ey = Young's modulus in y direction (input as EY on MP command)
x = strain of middle fiber in x direction
Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

223

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library


Mx = moment per unit length
xy = Poisson's ratio (input as PRXY on MP command)
x = curvature in x direction
A nonuniform material may be represented with Equation 193 as:
Mx = Cr

t3E x

Ey
12 1 2
xy

Ex

(194)

where:
Cr = bending moment multiplier (input as RMI on RMORE command)
The above discussion relates only to the formulation of the stiffness matrix.
Similarly, stresses for uniform materials are determined by:
t

top = E x + x
x
2

(195)

bot = E x x
x
2

(196)

where:
top = x direction stress at top fiber
x
bot = x direction stress at bottom fiber
x
For nonuniform materials, the stresses are determined by:
top = E( x + c t x )
x

(197)

bot = E( x cb x )
x

(198)

where:
ct = top bending stress multiplier (input as CTOP, RMORE command)
cb = bottom bending stress multiplier (input as CBOT, RMORE command)
The resultant moments (output as MX, MY, MXY) are determined from the output stresses rather than from
Equation 194.

224

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.10.2. Assumptions and Restrictions

1.9.6. Extrapolation of Results to the Nodes


Integration point results can be requested to be copied to the nodes (ERESX,NO command). For the case
of quadrilateral shaped elements, the bending results of each subtriangle are averaged and copied to the
node of the quadrilateral which shares two edges with that subtriangle.

1.10. PLANE82 - 2-D 8-Node Structural Solid


K

O
N

L
J

Y,v
P
M
X,R,u
I

Matrix or Vector

Geometry

Shape Functions

Integration Points

Mass, Stiffness and Stress


Stiffness Matrices; and
Thermal Load Vector

Quad

Equation 12131 and Equation 12132

2x2

Triangle

Equation 12110 and Equation 12111

Pressure Load Vector

Same as stiffness matrix, specialized to the face

Load Type

2 along face

Distribution

Element Temperature

Same as shape functions across element, constant thru thickness or


around circumference

Nodal Temperature

Same as element temperature distribution

Pressure

Linear along each face

Reference: Zienkiewicz

1.10.1. Other Applicable Sections


"Structures" describes the derivation of structural element matrices and load vectors as well as stress evaluations.

1.10.2. Assumptions and Restrictions


A dropped midside node implies that the face is and remains straight.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

225

Chapter 1: Archived Theory Element Library

1.11. SOLID92 - 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid


L

P
Y,v

K
N

X,u
Z,w

Matrix or Vector

Shape Functions

Integration Points

Stiffness, Mass, and Stress


Stiffness Matrices; and
Thermal Load Vector

Equation 12182, Equation 12183, and Equation 12184

Pressure Load Vector

Equation 12182, Equation 12183, and Equation 12184 specialized to the face

Load Type

Distribution

Element Temperature

Same as shape functions

Nodal Temperature

Same as shape functions

Pressure

Linear over each face

Reference: Zienkiewicz

1.11.1. Other Applicable Sections


"Structures" describes the derivation of structural element matrices and load vectors as well as stress evaluations.

226

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

1.12.1. Other Applicable Sections

1.12. SOLID95 - 3-D 20-Node Structural Solid

r
X P
M
Y,v

Z,w

Y
X,u

U B
T

Geometry

Matrix or Vector

O
V

Shape Functions

Integration Points

Brick

Wedge

Equation 12210, Equation 12211, and Equation 12212

3x3

Pyramid

Equation 12195, Equation 12196, and Equation 12197

2x2x2

Tet

Equation 12182, Equation 12183, and Equation 12184

Quad

Equation 1283 and Equation 1284

3x3

Triangle

Stiffness, Mass, and


Stress Stiffness
Matrices; and
Thermal Load Vector

Equation 12233 , Equation 12234, and Equation 12235

Equation 1257 and Equation 1258

Pressure Load Vector

Load Type

14 if KEYOPT(11) = 0
2 x 2 x 2 if KEYOPT(11) = 1

Distribution

Element Temperature

Same as shape functions thru element

Nodal Temperature

Same as shape functions thru element

Pressure

Bilinear across each face

Reference: Zienkiewicz

1.12.1. Other Applicable Sections


"Structures" describes the derivation of structural element matrices and load vectors as well as stress evaluations. If KEYOPT(3) = 1, the mass matrix is diagonalized as described in Lumped Matrices.

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

227

228

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 2: Hydrodynamic Loads on Line Elements


Hydrodynamic effects may occur because the structure moves in a motionless fluid, the structure is fixed
but there is fluid motion, or both the structure and fluid are moving. The fluid motion consists of two parts:
current and wave motions. The current is input by giving the current velocity and direction (input as W(i)
and (i)) at up to eight different vertical stations (input as Z(i)). (All input quantities referred to in this section
not otherwise identified come from the TBDATA commands used with TB,WATER). The velocity and direction
are interpolated linearly between stations. The current is assumed to flow horizontally only.
The information in this section applies to the legacy PIPE59 element.
The following topic is available:
2.1. Wave Theory

2.1. Wave Theory


The wave may be input using one of four wave theories in the following table (input as KWAVE via TB,WATER).

Table 2.1 Wave Theory Table


KWAVE TB,WATER Input

Description of Wave Theory


Small amplitude wave theory, unmodified (Airy wave theory), (Wheeler())

Small amplitude wave theory, modified with empirical depth decay function,
(Wheeler())

Stokes fifth order wave theory, (Skjelbreia et al.())

Stream function wave theory, (Dean())

The free surface of the wave is defined by


Nw

Nw

Hi
cosi
i =1 2

s = i =
i =1

(21)

where:
s = total wave height
number of waves
Nw = number of wave components =
5

if K w 2
if K w = 2

Kw = wave theory key (input as KWAVE with TB,WATER)


i = wave height of component i
input quantity A(i)
Hi = surface coefficient =
derived from other input

if K w = 0 or 1
if K w = 2

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

229

Chapter 2: Hydrodynamic Loads on Line Elements

R t
i
2 +

i i 360

2 R t + i (i)

i i 360

i = 0.0

if L w = 0 and K w = 0 or 1
if L w = 0 and K w = 2 or 3
if L w = 1
if L w = 2
if L w = 3
if L w = 4

R = radial distance to point on element from origin in the X-Y plane in the direction of the wave
i = wave length = input as WL(i) if WL(i) > 0.0 and if Kw = 0 or 1 otherwise derived from Equation 22 (p. 230)
t = time elapsed (input as TIME on TIME command) (Note that the default value of TIME is usually not
desired. If zero is desired, 10-12 can be used).
input as (i)
i = wave period =
derived from other input

if K w 3
if K w = 3

i = phase shift = input as (i)


If i is not input (set to zero) and Kw < 2, i is computed iteratively from:
2d
i = idtanh

(22)

where:
i = output quantity small amplitude wave length
g( i )2
= output quantity deep water wave length
2
g = acceleration due to gravity (Z direction) (input on ACEL command)
d = water depth (input as DEPTH via TB,WATER)
id =

Each component of wave height is checked that it satisfies the Miche criterion if Kw 3. This is to ensure
that the wave is not a breaking wave, which the included wave theories do not cover. A breaking wave is
one that spills over its crest, normally in shallow water. A warning message is issued if:
Hi > Hb

(23)

where:
2d
Hb = 0.142i tanh
= height of breaking wave
i

230

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

2.1. Wave Theory


When using wave loading, there is an error check to ensure that the input acceleration does not change
after the first load step, as this would imply a change in the wave behavior between load steps.
For Kw = 0 or 1, the particle velocities at integration points are computed as a function of depth from:
Nw

cosh(ki Zf ) 2
i + vD
i =1 sinh(k id) i

vR =

(24)

Nw

sinh(ki Zf )

i
i =1 sinh(k id)

vZ =

(25)

where:
vR = radial particle velocity
v Z = vertical particle velocity
ki = 2/i
Z = height of integration point above the ocean floor = d+Z

i = time derivative of
i
vD = drift velocity (input via TB,WATER)
1.0

f = d
d +
s

if K w = 0 (small amplitude wave theory)


if K w = 1 (Wheeler(35))

The particle accelerations are computed by differentiating vR and v Z with respect to time. Thus:
cosh(ki Zf ) 2

( i Ci )
i =1 sinh(k id) i

(26)

sinh(ki Zf ) 2 2

i Ci

i =1 sinh(k id) i i
2

(27)

Nw

vR =

Nw

vZ =

where:
2
Zd

s
i (d + s )2
C=

0.0

if K w = 0 (small amplitude wave theory)


if K w = 1 (Wheeler(35))

Expanding equation 2.29 of the Shore Protection Manual() for a multiple component wave, the wave hydrodynamic pressure is:
Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

231

Chapter 2: Hydrodynamic Loads on Line Elements


Z
cosh 2
Nw
i
d
Po = w g i

i =1
d
cosh 2
i

(28)

However, use of this equation leads to nonzero total pressure at the surface at the crest or trough of the
wave. Thus, Equation 28 (p. 232) is modified to be:

Zd
cosh 2

Nw
id + s
d
Po = w g i

i =1
d
cosh 2
i

(29)

which does result in a total pressure of zero at all points of the free surface. This dynamic pressure, which
is calculated at the integration points during the stiffness pass, is extrapolated to the nodes for the stress
pass. The hydrodynamic pressure for Stokes fifth order wave theory is:

Z
cosh 2

5
i

d
Po = w g i

i =1
d
cosh 2
i

(210)

Other aspects of the Stokes fifth order wave theory are discussed by Skjelbreia et al. (). The modification as
suggested by Nishimura et al.() has been included. The stream function wave theory is described by Dean().
If both waves and current are present, the question of wave-current interaction must be dealt with. Three
options are made available through Kcr (input as KCRC via TB,WATER):
For Kcr = 0, the current velocity at all points above the mean sea level is simply set equal to Wo, where Wo
is the input current velocity at Z = 0.0. All points below the mean sea level have velocities selected as though
there were no wave.
For Kcr = 1, the current velocity profile is stretched or compressed to fit the wave. In equation form, the
Z coordinate location of current measurement is adjusted by
Z( j) = Z( j)

d + s
+ s
d

(211)

where:
Z(j) = Z coordinate location of current measurement (input as Z(j))
Z( j) = adjusted value of Z(j)

232

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

2.1. Wave Theory


For Kcr = 2, the same adjustment as for Kcr = 1 is used, as well as a second change that accounts for continuity. That is,
W ( j) = W ( j)

d
d + s

(212)

where:
W(j) = velocity of current at this location (input as W(j))
W ( j) = adjusted value of W(j)
These three options are shown pictorially in Figure 2.1 (p. 233).

Figure 2.1 Velocity Profiles for Wave-Current Interactions

Z
Water Surface

Mean Water
Surface
Constant (K CR = 0)
Stretch (K CR = 1)
Continuity (K CR = 2)
Nonlinear Stretch (K CR = 3)
Horizontal arrows represent
input velocities

Mud Line

To compute the relative velocities ( {un } , {ut } ), both the fluid particle velocity and the structure velocity
must be available so that one can be subtracted from the other. The fluid particle velocity is computed using
relationships such as Equation 24 (p. 231) and Equation 25 (p. 231) as well as current effects. The structure
velocity is available through the Newmark time integration logic (see Transient Analysis).
Finally, a generalized Morison's equation is used to compute a distributed load on the element to account
for the hydrodynamic effects:
De

{un } {un } + CM w De2 {vn }


2
4
D

+CT w e {ut } {ut }


2

{F / L} d = CD w

(213)

where:
{F/L}d = vector of loads per unit length due to hydrodynamic effects
CD = coefficient of normal drag (see below)

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

233

Chapter 2: Hydrodynamic Loads on Line Elements


w = water density (mass/length3) (input as DENSW on MP command with TB,WATER)
De = outside diameter of the pipe with insulation (length)

{un } = normal relative particle velocity vector (length/time)


CM = coefficient of inertia (input as CM on the R command)

{vn } = normal particle acceleration vector (length/time2)


CT = coefficient of tangential drag (see below)

{ut } = tangential relative particle velocity vector (length/time)


Two integration points along the length of the element are used to generate the load vector. Integration
points below the mud line are simply bypassed. For elements intersecting the free surface, the integration
points are distributed along the wet length only.
The coefficients of drag (CD,CT) may be defined in one of two ways:

As fixed numbers (via both the R and RMORE commands), or

As functions of Reynolds number.

The dependency on Reynolds number (Re) may be expressed as:


CD = fD (Re)

(214)

where:
fD = functional relationship (input on the water motion table as RE, CDy, and CDz via TB,WATER)
D

Re = {un } e w

= viscosity (input as VISC on MP command)


and
CT = fTRe

(215)

where:
fT = functional relationship (input on the water motion table as RE and CT via TB,WATER)
D

Re = {ut } e w

Temperature-dependent quantity may be input as , where the temperatures used are those given by input
quantities T(i) of the water motion table.
When the MacCamy-Fuchs corrections are requested to account for diffraction effects, especially for large
diameter objects with shorter wave lengths, two things occur:
1.

234

The coefficient of inertia is adjusted:

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

2.1. Wave Theory


2

Cm = Cm

x 2
2

[J1( x )] [Y1( x )]

where:
x=

De
1

J (x)

J1( x ) = Jo ( x ) 1
x
Y (x)

Y1( x ) = Yo ( x ) 1
x
J0 = zero order Bessel function of the first kind
J1 = first-order Bessel function of the first kind
Y0 = zero order Bessel function of the second kind
Y1 = first-order Bessel function of the second kind
2.

The phase shift is added to i (before the Wc correction, if used):


J( x )
= i + arctan
i
Y( x )

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

235

236

Release 13.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Potrebbero piacerti anche